Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Vol 1 Specs
Phase III – Worship Space St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church 1402 West Main Street Carmel, Indiana 46032 Project Manual Construction Documents Volume 1 Division 00 - 14 September 19, 2008 600 Kentucky Avenue Suite 101 Indianapolis, Indiana 46225 (317) 632-7484 (317) 687-2064 Fax CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: 1850 West 15th Street Indianapolis, Indiana 46202 (317) 681-1000, FAX (317) 684-9694 VS ENGINEERING, INC. 4275 N. HIGH SCHOOL ROAD INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46254 (317)293-3542 FAX 293-4737 LAWSON ELSER INC. ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS 650 E. CARMEL DRIVE, SUITE 150 CARMEL, IN 46032 317 574-9409 FAX 574-9431 R.E. Dimond and Associates, Inc. Consulting Engineers 732 North Capitol Avenue, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204 (317) 634-4672 Fax 638-8725 Copyright 2008 Woollen, Molzan & Partners, Inc. All Rights Reserved PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00-14 - CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Phase # 3 Addition to ST. CHRISTOPHER’S EPISCOPAL CHURCH OWNER: St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church 1402 West Main Street Carmel, Indiana 46032 (317) 846-8716 ARCHITECT: Woollen, Molzan and Partners, Inc. 600 Kentucky Avenue, Suite 101 Indianapolis, Indiana 46225 (317) 632-7484, Fax (317) 687-2064 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL R. E. Dimond & Associates, Inc ENGINEER: Consulting Engineers. 732 North Capitol Avenue Indianapolis, Indiana 46204 (317) 634-4672, Fax (317) 638-8725 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Lawson Elser Inc.. 650 East Carmel Drive Carmel , Indiana 46032 (317) 574-9409, Fax (317) 574-9431 CIVIL ENGINEER: VS Engineering, Inc. 4275 N. High School Road Indianapolis, Indiana 46254 (317 293-3542, Fax (317) 293-4737 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: PEPPER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY OF INDIANA, LLC 1850 West 15 th Street Indianapolis, Indiana 46202 (317) 681-1000, FAX (317) 684-9694 DATE: September 19, 2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1: DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Section 00 43 33 - Subcontractors and Product List Remainder By Pepper Construction. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work Section 01 11 10 - Project Code Summary Section 01 12 16 - Sequence Work Section 01 19 00 - Miscellaneous General Requirements Section 01 21 00 - Allowances Section 01 23 00 - Alternates Section 01 29 00 - Application for Payment Section 01 31 19 - Project Meetings Section 01 32 13 - Construction Schedules Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Section 01 45 24 - Testing Agency Services (By Contractor) Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities Section 01 52 13 - Field Offices and Sheds Section 01 56 00 - Barriers Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements Section 01 62 00 - Products Options and Substitutions Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching Section 01 74 23 - Cleaning Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout Section 01 79 00 - Systems Demonstration DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK Section 02 32 00 - Geotechnical Investigations Section 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition Section 02 71 00 - Foundation Drainage DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - Cast in Place Concrete Section 03 41 00 - Precast Structural Concrete DIVISION 4 – MASONRY Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry Section 04 43 10 - Limestone Section 04 43 12 - Limestone Rubble Veneer TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joists Section 05 31 00 - Steel Deck Section 05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Section 05 51 13 - Metal Pan Stairs DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Section 06 40 00 - Finish Carpentry and Millwork Section 06 61 16 - Solid Polymer Fabrications DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 14 00 - Waterproofing Fluid-applied Section 07 21 00 - Building Insulation Section 07 22 00 - Nail-base Roof Insulation Section 07 26 00 - Plastic Sheet Vapor Barriers and Retarders Section 07 27 00 - Air Barrier/Weather Resistant Barrier Section 07 31 13 - Fiberglass Reinforced Asphalt Shingles Section 07 62 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping Section 07 86 00 - Smokestopping Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants Section 07 95 00 - Expansion Control DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors & Frames Section 08 14 33 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum Framing and Entrances Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows Section 08 52 13 - Aluminum Clad Wood Windows & Doors Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing Section 08 90 00 - Louvers DIVISION 9 – FINISH Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Wallboard Section 09 24 13 - Cement Lathing & Plastering (Stucco) Section 09 27 13 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Fabrications (GFRG) Section 09 30 13 - Ceramic Tile Section 09 51 10 - Acoustical Ceiling Systems Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring and Base TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 Section 09 68 13 - Carpet Tile Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishing DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10 28 13 - Toilet and Miscellaneous Accessories Section 10 44 00 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (NONE) DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12 32 16 - Manufactured Cabinets and Casework (Plastic Laminate) DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NONE) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14 24 25 - Hydraulic Elevator (Holeless) VOLUME 2: DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15000 - Mechanical Index Section 15010 - General Provisions Section 15050 - Basic Materials & Methods Section 15060 - Pipe, Valves and Fittings Section 15180 - Insulation Section 15183 - HVAC Water Treatment Section 15400 - Plumbing Section 15410 - Drainage Products Section 15420 - Plumbing Equipment and Devices Section 15500 - Fire Protection Section 15700 - Liquid Heat Transfer Section 15800 - Air Distribution Section 15900 – Temperature Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Section 16000 - Electrical Index Section 16010 - General Provisions Section 16040 - Labeling and Identification Section 16042 - Testing and Proof of Performance Section 16110 - Electrical Raceways Section 16120 - Electrical Wiring Section 16130 - Electrical Outlet & Junction Boxes Section 16140 - Electrical Wiring Devices and Contactors Section 16160 - Electrical Motor Starters Section 16170 - Electrical Safety Switches Section 16180 - Overcurrent Protection Section 16450 - Grounding Section 16470 - Branch Circuit Panelboards Section 16472 - Distribution Panelboards Section 16510 - Electrical Light Fixtures Section 16551 - Electrical Lamps Section 16552 - Electrical Ballasts Section 16670 – Lightning Protection System Section 16740 – Telephone and Data Conduit System Section 16921 – Temperature Control and Interlocking Section 16930 – Lighting Control Equipment DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 11 00 - Site Preparation Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork Section 31 23 33 - Trenching Section 31 31 16 - Soil Treatment DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 12 17 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving (Inside Indiana) Section 32 13 00 - Concrete Walks, Ramps, Steps and Curbing Section 32 92 19 - Topsoiling and Seeding DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 33 49 00 - Drainage Structures, Pipes and Fitting END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 43 33 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND PRODUCTS LIST PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 00 43 33: SUBCONTRACTORS AND PRODUCTS LIST PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The low bidders shall furnish within 24 hours after receipt of bids to the office of the Architect, two (2) copies of the Subcontractors and Products List. B. The Owner and Architect shall have the right to choose the Subcontractor, material or equipment for any particular item where the bidder either fails to list the same or lists more than one (1) item for the item in question. C. It is intended that this list will show the manufacturer and/or supplier of all major items of work that will be subcontracted and to whom. D. After submission of this list by the bidder and after the approval of same by the Architect and Owner, it shall not be changed unless written approval of said change is authorized by the Owner and Architect, and unless said change results in a revision of the contract price beneficial to the Owner. E. Architect and Owner reserve the right to reject any submission of materials, work or subcontract that does not, in their opinion, meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications unless such materials, work or subcontract was requested by Bidder prior to bidding and approved by Addendum. F. Submission does not constitute approval. Materials and subcontractors are subject to provisions of General Conditions and "Standards of Product Approval" and must be formally approved by Architect. 00 43 33 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND PRODUCTS LIST PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 This list to be submitted within 24 hours after bid THIS BID IS BASED ON USING THE FOLLOWING CONTRACTOR TO DO THE WORK: Prime Contractor: _______________________________________________________________ DESCRIPTION SUBCONTRACTOR PRODUCT AND/OR AND/OR SUPPLIER MANUFACTURER Earthwork __________________ ____________________ Concrete __________________ ___________________ Precast Concrete __________________ ___________________ Masonry __________________ ___________________ Limestone __________________ ___________________ Limestone Rubble Veneer __________________ ___________________ Structural Steel __________________ ___________________ Steel Joist __________________ ___________________ Steel Deck __________________ ___________________ Cold formed Metal Framing __________________ ___________________ Metal Fabrications __________________ ___________________ Metal Stairs __________________ ___________________ Rough Carpentry __________________ ___________________ Finish Carpentry and Millwork__________________ ___________________ Roofing __________________ ___________________ Flashing and Sheet Metal ___________________ ___________________ Sealants __________________ ___________________ Metal Doors and Frames __________________ ___________________ 00 43 33 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND PRODUCTS LIST PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 Wood Doors __________________ ___________________ Alum Framing & Entrances __________________ ___________________ Alum Windows __________________ ___________________ Alum Clad Wood Windows __________________ ___________________ Finish Hardware __________________ ___________________ Gypsum Wallboard __________________ ___________________ Stucco __________________ ___________________ Ceramic Tile __________________ ___________________ Acoustical Ceiling __________________ ___________________ Resilient Flooring __________________ ___________________ Carpet __________________ ___________________ Carpet Tile __________________ ___________________ Painting and Finishing __________________ ___________________ Toilet Accessories __________________ ___________________ Fire Extinguishers __________________ ___________________ 00 43 33 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND PRODUCTS LIST PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 THIS BID IS BASED ON USING THE FOLLOWING MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR TO DO THE WORK: Mechanical Subcontractor: ____________________________________________________ DESCRIPTION SUBCONTRACTOR PRODUCT AND/OR AND/OR SUPPLIER MANUFACTURER Mechanical Insulation __________________ ___________________ Air Cooled Chiller __________________ ___________________ Air Handling Units __________________ ___________________ VAV Boxes __________________ ___________________ Hydronic Pumps & Trim __________________ ___________________ Mechanical Equipment __________________ ___________________ Sheet Metal __________________ ___________________ Grilles and Diffusers __________________ ___________________ H.V.A.C. Controls __________________ ___________________ Fire Protection __________________ ___________________ Plumbing Fixtures __________________ ___________________ Gas Fired Condensing __________________ __________________ Boilers Exhaust Fans __________________ __________________ 00 43 33 - SUBCONTRACTORS AND PRODUCTS LIST PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 THIS BID IS BASED ON USING THE FOLLOWING ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR TO DO THE WORK: Electrical Contractor:_________________________________________________________ DESCRIPTION SUBCONTRACTOR PRODUCT AND/OR AND/OR SUPPLIER MANUFACTURER Wiring Devices __________________ ___________________ Disconnect Switches __________________ ___________________ Panelboards __________________ ___________________ Fire Alarm System Devices __________________ ___________________ Light Fixtures __________________ ___________________ (List a manufacturer for each type of fixture) Dimming System __________________ ___________________ Wire __________________ __________________ Conduit __________________ __________________ Sound System __________________ __________________ END OF SECTION 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 1 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 11 00: SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The work consists of construction of a new Worship building addition and limited renovation to the existing facility with associated site work... 1.02 WORK EXCLUDED FROM THIS PROJECT A. Furnishings and equipment, except as noted on the Drawings. B. Asbestos abatement. 1.03 CONTRACTS A. All work for the project will be performed under a single General Contractor, including plumbing, mechanical, fire protection, and electrical work, where basis of payment is a unified bid. B. It is expected that work will be performed under the direction of the General Contractor. Certain items of work may be indicated to be "not-in-contract" or "by others". In these cases the Contractor shall coordinate with such other contractors or persons as the Owner may direct to achieve final installation or construction. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Owner: St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church, 1402 West Main Street, Carmel, Indiana 46032 B. Architect: Woollen, Molzan and Partners, 600 Kentucky Avenue, Suite 101, Indianapolis, Indiana, 46225. C. Construction Manager: Pepper Construction Company of Indiana, LLC. 1850 West 15 th Street Indianapolis, Indiana 46202 1.05 PROJECT TIME SCHEDULE A. Work of the project shall start within ten (10) calendar days after the contract signing or issuance of a Notice to Proceed. 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 2 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 1.06 WORK SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall schedule all construction activities as required to achieve an orderly and expeditious prosecution of all work covered by the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor, in cooperation with his subcontractors, shall prepare and adhere to a comprehensive Construction Schedule designed to complete the total project within the time specified in Paragraph 1.05 and prepared in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 32 13 - Construction Schedules. 1.07 MANAGEMENT OF CONTRACTOR'S FORCES A. Designate a superintendent who shall represent the Contractor on the jobsite. Directions given to this superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The superintendent shall be on the jobsite each day throughout the entirety of the contract, except for legal holidays and illnesses. B. Man, schedule and supervise the work to meet the construction schedule. C. Directions from the Owner to the Contractor will only be through the Architect. Contractor shall not accept direction from nor negotiate changes with the Owner. END OF SECTION 01 11 10 – PROJECT CODE SUMMARY PAGE 1 OF 1 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 11 10: PROJECT CODE SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INFORMATION A. The Attached Summary of Code requirements for Fire Protection and Life Safety, dated July 8, 2008, was prepared by RTM Consultants, Inc. This record is offered as information to the Building Officials and the Contractors. PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not used. PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not used. END OF SECTION RTM CONSULTANTS, INC. — 6640 Parkdale Place, Suite J — INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46254 tel: 317-329-7700 — fax: 317-329-8411 — www.rtmconsultants.com July 8, 2008 Revised July 31, 2008 Mr. Joseph A. Schmit Woollen, Molzan and Partners The Majestic 47 South Pennsylvania Indianapolis, IN 46204 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church 2008 Phase 3 Design Document Code Review Dear Joe: This letter, along with the attached code summary, is being forwarded to document our review of the Design Documents for Phase 3 of the St. Christopher Episcopal Church which will add the Sanctuary to the previously completed fellowship and classroom wings. The earlier phases of this project were reviewed by our firm in 2000 and 2003. The previous phases of the project were reviewed and completed under the provisions of the 2003 editions of the Indiana Building, Fire and Mechanical Codes. As of June 16, 2008, Indiana has adopted the 2008 Indiana Building, Fire and Mechanical Codes. These standards have been used to review the project. As the previous phases have been completed our remarks will be confined to Phase 3 of the project. We have the following comments: 1. The new Phase 3 sanctuary portion of the Church facility will be classified as an A-3 occupancy in accordance with Section 303.1 IBC. The existing administrative offices are classified as a B occupancy and the classroom wing is classified as an E occupancy. The fellowship space is also classified as a Group A-3 occupancy. Occupancy separations are not required between the distinct occupancies provided that the requirements for construction type, sprinklers and fire alarm systems based on the most restrictive occupancy are applied to the whole building in accordance with Secton 508.3.2 IBC. In this case the requirements for the A-3 occupancy will govern these issues. We have evaluated the project based on these uses remaining unseparated. 2. As addressed in item 1, for the purposes of allowable area and height, the building will be based on the most restrictive which will be the A-3 occupancy.In accordance with Section 503.1 IBC, the minimum permissible construction type is Type V-B. Type V-B construction permits any materials allowed within the code to be utilized in the construction and there is not a requirement for a fire resistive rating on structural elements. 3. The allowable floor area for an A-3 occupancy of Type V-B construction is 22,500 square feet per floor with two floors permitted. The total area of the first floor of the addition and the existing building is 28,932 square feet. Based on this fact, a two hour, structurally independent fire wall will need to be constructed between the existing building and the sanctuary addition. 4. The construction type of the Porte Cochere will be consistent with that of the Church which in this case is Type 5-B. Any materials permitted by code may be used. It should be noted that in accordance with 5-13.8 NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems, sprinklers are required under the roof of the Porte Cochere if the construction is combustible. Mr. Joseph A. Schmit July 8, 2008 Revised July 31, 2008 St. Christopher Episcopal Church - Phase 3 Code Review Page 2 RTM CONSULTANTS, INC. — 6640 Parkdale Place, Suite J — INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46254 tel: 317-329-7700 — fax: 317-329-8411 — www.rtmconsultants.com 5. The sanctuary has a calculated occupant load of approximately 552 with rows of chairs. Section 1008.1 IBC requires a main exit that will accommodate one half of the total occupant load (276) in the sanctuary. A main exit that is approximately 42 inches wide is required. The main exit is more than sufficiently wide. Section 1008.2 requires that the remaining one half of the required exit width is distributed around the perimeter of the assembly room. The location and capacity of the additional exit locations meets this criteria. The occupant load of the sanctuary is in excess of 500 and therefore three distinct exits are required in accordance with Section 1025.2 IBC. 6. In accordance with 1008.1.9 IBC, panic hardware is required on any exit door serving an assembly occupancy with an occupant load of 50 or more. This will apply to all of the doors serving the Sanctuary that have latching hardware. If the doors do not need to latch, push / pull hardware may be used. 7. In accordance with Table 508.2 IBC storage rooms in excess of 100 square feet in area are required to be enclosed with one hour fire barriers or be protected with automatic sprinklers and smoke resistant separations. Given that the building is protected throughout with automatic sprinklers, the sprinkler option will suffice. The doors to these rooms are required to be self closing or automatic closing in accordance with Section 508.2.2.1 IBC. This will apply to the following areas: Storage 119 Chancel Storage Table 508.2 also has requirements for furnace rooms with equipment rated at over 400,000 Btu’s and Boiler rooms where the largest piece of equipment is rated at over15psi and 10 hp. Either 1 hour separation or sprinklers and smoke resistant separations are required. 8. In accordance with Section 1020.1 exc. 9 IBC exit stairs are permitted to be unenclosed provided the stairs connect only the first and second stories of the building and the building is protected throughout with automatic sprinklers. Previous editions of the code limited the open stairs to 50% of the total. The stair serving the second floor of the sanctuary portion of the facility may be unenclosed. 9. The floor opening in the narthex between the first and second floors is permitted in accordance with Section 707.2 exc. 7. IBC. Mr. Joseph A. Schmit July 8, 2008 Revised July 31, 2008 St. Christopher Episcopal Church - Phase 3 Code Review Page 3 RTM CONSULTANTS, INC. — 6640 Parkdale Place, Suite J — INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46254 tel: 317-329-7700 — fax: 317-329-8411 — www.rtmconsultants.com 10. Based on seating with rows of chairs as shown in the parlor, the occupant load is in excess of 50. In accordance with Section 1015.1, this room will need two remote means of egress. The second means of egress can be through an adjoining room provided that it is accessory and not hazardous. We hope that this information is helpful. If you have any further questions, please contact us. Very Truly Yours, RTM Consultants, Inc. Douglas B. Trent Senior Project Manager DBT/dbt 649.001B RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Summary of Code Requirements for Fire Protection and Life Safety St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church Carmel, IN Prepared for: Woollen, Molzan and Partners The Majestic 47 South Pennsylvania Indianapolis, Indiana 46204 Prepared by: RTM Consultants, Inc. 6640 Parkdale Place, Suite J Indianapolis, IN 46254 (317) 329-7700 Project# 649.001B July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 2 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Fire Protection Code Summary Client: Woollen, Molzan and Partners RTM Project Number: 649.001B Date Prepared: July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Prepared by: Douglas B. Trent Codes Used for Summary: 2008 Indiana Building Code 2008 Indiana Mechanical Code 2008 Indiana Fire Code NFPA 13, 1999 Edition General Administrative Rules Code references are from the Indiana Building Code unless otherwise noted St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 3 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Building/Project Description Building: New Church Facility. Use: Worship Fellowship Classrooms Offices Height: Two Stories Floor Area: (addition) First Floor: 12,182 sq. ft. Second Floor: 4,859 sq. ft. 17,041 square feet St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 4 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Occupancy and Construction Types Occupancy Classification: A-3 B (Admin) E-1 (Classroom wing, Daycare) 303.1 304.1 305.1 Construction Type (Minimum Permitted): Type V-B 503 Building Elements - Fire Resistive Requirements: Bearing Walls - Exterior: <10 feet to Prop. Line: $ 10 feet to Prop. Line: 1 hour 0 hours Tables 601 and 602 Bearing Walls - Interior: 0 hours Table 602 Nonbearing Walls - Exterior: <10 feet to Prop. Line: $ 10 feet to Prop. Line: 1 hour 0 hours Tables 601 and 602 Partitions - Permanent: No Requirement Table 601 Shaft Enclosures: 1 hour 707.4 Floors and Floor - Ceilings: 0 hours Table 601 Roofs and Roof Ceilings: 0 hours Table 601 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 5 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Allowable Area and Height Allowable area per floor based on A-3 occupancy(square feet): Basic Allowable: Frontage: Sprinklers: Total: 6,000 4,500 12,000 22,500 Table 503 506.2 506.3 Allowable height: Stories: Sprinkler Increase: Total: Feet: Sprinkler Increase: Total: 1 1 2 40 20 60 Table 503 Section 504.2 Table 503 Section 504.2 Rated Separations Fire Walls: Required at the connections to the existing building for allowable area purposes. 503.1 Rating: 2 hours 705.4 Opening Protection: 1 ½ hours labeled doors Table 715.4 Duct Penetrations: Protected with 1 ½ hour rated fire dampers. 705.11, Table 716.3.1 Stability: Designed to remain standing in the event of structural collapse on either side. 705.2 Termination: Parapet extending to 30 inches above the roof. 705.6 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 6 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Occupancy Separations: None required between the A-3 occupancy and the B and E occupancies if the entire building complies with the most stringent requirements for allowable height and area, fire protection and fire alarm systems for each of the occupancies housed therein. 508.3.2 Boiler / Furnace Rooms: Automatic sprinklers or One hour fire barrier required when a single piece of equipment is rated at 400,000 Btu/hr input or greater. Table 508.2 Storage Rooms > 100 square feet One hour fire barrier or automatic sprinklers with a smoke resistant separation Table 302.1.1 Firestopping: Required for penetrations of fire resistive assemblies. 712 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 7 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Exits Occupant Load Factors (Square feet per person): Pews: 18 inches of pew per person 1004.7 Assembly / Worship: 7 (loose chairs in rows) Table 1004.1.1 Mechanical: 300 Table 1004.1.1 Storage: 300 Table 1004.1.1 Number of Exits: Two exits required for: Pews: 50 occupants or more Table 1015.1 Worship (Loose Chairs): 350 sq. ft. or more Table 1015.1 Mechanical: 15,000 sq. ft. of more Table 1015.1 Storage: 15,000 sq. ft. or more Table 1015.1 Three exits required for: 501 to 1000 occupants Table 1019.1 Four exits required for: More than 1000 occupants Table 1019.1 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 8 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Exits (Cont.) Main Exit: A main exit sized to serve one half of the occupant load in A-3 occupancies with an occupant load of 300 or more is required. 1025.2 Other Exits: In addition to the main exit required for an A-3 occupancy, additional exits are required from the room or area with a capacity of not less than one half of the total occupant load. 1025.3 Exit Separation: When two exits are required; by one third of the diagonal distance of the area served. 1015.2.1 exc. 2 Maximum Travel Distance to an Exit: 250 feet (Sprinklered) Table 1016.1 Exit Doors: Egress Width Factor: 0.15 inches per person Table 1005.1 Width (maximum): 4 feet 1008.1.1 Width (minimum): 3 feet (32 inches net clear) 1008.1.1 Swing: In the direction of egress when serving an occupant load of 50 or more. 1008.1.2 Panic Hardware: Required where the door serves an occupant load of 50 or more. 1008.1.9 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 9 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Exits (Cont.) Exit Stairs: Egress width Factor: .2 inches per person Table 1005.1 Minimum Width: 44" minimum when serving an occupant load of 50 or more. 1009.1 Rise: 4 inch minimum, 7 inch maximum 1009.3 Run: 11 inches minimum 1009.3 Handrails: Required both sides 1009.10 Exit Enclosures: Stairs are required to be enclosed in one hour shaft construction. Exit stairs serving only the first and second floors may be unenclosed provided there are no openings to other levels such as a basement. 1020.1, 1020.1 exc. 9. Exit Signs: Required as necessary to clearly indicate the direction of egress. No further than 100 feet apart. Rooms which require only one exit need not have exit signs. 1011.1 Power Supply: Normal and emergency Power required 1011.5.3 Exit Illumination: The means of egress including the exit discharge shall be illuminated at all times that the building is occupied at one foot candle at floor level. 1006.1 and 1006.2 Power Supply: Normal and emergency Power required 1006.3 Corridors St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 10 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Corridors: Construction: Walls of corridors are not required to be of one hour fire resistive construction when the building is protected with automatic sprinklers. Table 1017.1 Doors: No requirements Table 1017.1 Windows: No requirements. Table 1017.1 Smoke/Fire Dampers: Not required. 716.5.4.1 Width: 44" minimum 1017.2 Dead-ends: 20 feet maximum when access to more than on exit is required. 1017.3 Fire Protection Systems St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 11 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Automatic sprinklers: Used for increase in allowable height and area and corridor trade- off. 504.2, 506.3 and 1017.1 Standpipes: Not required. 905.1 Fire Alarm: A manual fire alarm system is required. May be activated by sprinkler water flow in lieu of manual stations. 907.2.1 Signaling Devices: Audible and Visible required 907.9.1 and 907.9.2 Zoning Indicator Panel: Required. 907.8.1 Emergency Power: Battery backup required. NFPA 72 Smoke Detectors: Air Handling Systems: Required to shut down systems with capacity at 2000 cfm or greater. 606.2.1 IMC Design Code/ Standard NFPA 72 - 2002 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 12 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Finishes Flame Spread Ratings: Room Finish: A-3: 76-200 Table 803.5 Exit Enclosures: A-3: 26-75 Table 803.5 Corridors: A-3: 26-75 Table 803.5 Textiles: 0-25 803.6 Foam Plastic Insulation: 75 max. 2603.3 Thermal / Acoustic Insulation: 25 max. 719.3 Duct Insulation: 25 max. 604.3 IMC Materials Exposed Within a Plenum: 25 max. 602.2.1 IMC Maximum Smoke Density Ratings: Interior Finish: 450 803.1 Foam Plastic Insulation: 450 2603.3 Thermal / Acoustic Insulation: 450 718.3 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church July 8, 2008 Revised August 8, 2008 Fire Protection Code Summary Page 13 RTM Consultants, Inc. Indianapolis, IN Finishes (Cont.) Duct Insulation: 50 604.3 IMC Materials Exposed within a plenum: 50 602.2.1 IMC Roof Covering: Class C Table 1505.1 01 12 16 - SEQUENCE OF WORK PAGE 1 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 12 16: SEQUENCE OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling construction activities so as to complete the work in a timely manner and to avoid conflict among trades. B. During the course of construction, the Owner will continue to occupy and to use those parts of the existing building not immediately involved in construction activities. Consequently, it is also the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the scheduling of construction activities with the Owner to minimize interference with the Owner's continued use. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 32 13: Construction Schedules PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 SCHEDULING A. The Contractor shall coordinate closely with the Owner the timing of any construction activity, which could temporarily interfere with the Owner's continued use of the existing building. 1. Any interruption of utilities shall be scheduled with the Owner at least seven days in advance, and confirmed at least twenty-four hours in advance. 2. Large truck deliveries shall be coordinated with the Owner at least forty-eight hours in advance. Rescheduling of deliveries may be necessary to avoid conflict with church or preschool activities; such rescheduling shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. No work shall be performed on Sunday, except with the extraordinary permission of the Owner. B. In order to minimize disruption of the Owner's continued use of the existing the following phasing of work shall be employed: 01 12 16 - SEQUENCE OF WORK PAGE 2 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Provision of new utility service to the building. New utilities shall be completed up to the connection point before shutdown and changeover, to keep down time to a minimum. 2. Construction of the new addition and renovation work in the area of the existing building. Prior to the commencement of any demolition or construction work in this area, the partition wall shall be completed including a first coat of paint. The exit shall be preserved, and the exit shall be secured and protected from construction activity. Utilities to the existing building shall be maintained until the new addition is substantially complete. 2.02 PROJECT LIMITS A. Contractor parking, staging and equipment storage locations shall be coordinated with the Owner prior to the start of construction. B. Areas of the site and of the existing building not immediately involved in construction activities shall be protected from construction noise, dust, damage or hazard. 1. Provide Project limit fencing. END OF SECTION 01 19 00 - MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 19 00: MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Miscellaneous General Requirements include General Requirements not otherwise covered in Division 1 of the Specifications. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 00 72 13: General Conditions B. Section 01 11 00: Summary of Work PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall schedule all construction activities as required to achieve an orderly and expeditious prosecution of work covered by the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect for review, a comprehensive Construction Progress Schedule as specified herein: 1. Graphically show by "Critical Path" scheduling the order and interdependence of all activities necessary to complete the work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished, as planned by the Contractor and his project field superintendent in coordination with all subcontractors whose work is shown on the diagram. Include activities by the Owner and Architect that will affect the schedule. a) The approved Construction Schedule will be an integral part of the contract, and will establish interim completion dates for the various activities under the Contract. 2. Preliminary Analysis: Within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed or the execution of the Contract, submit one reproducible copy of a preliminary construction schedule prepared in accordance with paragraph "1" above. 01 19 00 - MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Construction Schedule: Within thirty (30) calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy of a revised construction schedule prepared in accordance with paragraph "1" above. 4. Periodic Reports: On the first working day of each month following the initial submittal described above, submit four (4) prints of the construction schedule updated to reflect actual progress. C. If at any time prior to the scheduled completion date the Contractor falls behind the Construction Progress Schedule, the rate of completion of the work shall be accelerated until such time that the work is back on schedule. All cost of extra and/or overtime labor which may be required to secure completion on schedule shall be borne by the Contractor, including costs incurred by the Owner and by the Architect in connection with expediting construction. D. Delays in construction caused by conditions beyond the control of the Contractor, as determined by the Architect, shall be reason for extension of said completion date. 1. Delays due to weather shall be considered reason for extension of completion date only if it can be shown that the weather experienced is significantly different from the average weather for the location and season. 2. The decision of the Architect shall be final. 2.02 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work of his subcontractors to the end that work of the several interests involved shall be properly related, fitted accurately in place and together, and neatly finished. No pleas of lack of knowledge of requirements of associated construction shall be considered as an excuse for error or conflict of work. Contractors must bear in mind that locations and connections shown on drawings are only approximate and subject to various manufacturer's standards for specific products or equipment furnished. Any minor changes in location of equipment, fixtures, etc. from locations shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge; to allow proper access, to coordinate with other work, or if so directed by the Architect. The Contractor shall administer necessary coordination among the trades. B. Work shall not be closed or covered until the Architect has reviewed it. Uncover any such work so that it can be properly inspected and then properly repair and replace all of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 01 19 00 - MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 C. In the event of conflict between Drawings and Specifications, or between drawings and specifications of different disciplines, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect of such conflict as soon as he becomes aware of it. The Architect shall be the sole arbiter of such conflict based on his interpretation of the intent of the Contract Documents. 2.03 FIRE PRECAUTIONS A. Reasonable precautions against fire shall be taken throughout operations. Flammable material shall be kept at an absolute minimum and shall be properly handled and stored. Open fires are prohibited at the site. B. Cutting or welding operations shall be performed with due precautions taken to prevent fires. Portable non-freeze chemical type fire extinguishers shall be provided at and below locations where cutting or welding operations are being performed. If such operations are extensive, a hose from the temporary water system shall be placed nearby. C. Provide two (2) temporary fire extinguishers on site throughout the construction period at locations directed by the Architect. 2.04 FIRST AID SUPPLIES A. The Contractor shall provide medical supplies and equipment at the site for first aid service to persons injured in connection with the work. 2.05 SITE DRAINAGE AND PLUMBING A. The Contractor shall take over the responsibility for site drainage upon entering the premises and shall maintain such drainage during the duration of the Contract, so as not to adversely affect the construction, the building, and the adjacent areas. B. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, provide and maintain all required pumps, suction and discharge lines, power, etc., in sufficient number, capacity, and configurations to keep all excavations, pits, trenches, footings, foundations and the entire property free from accumulation of water from any source whatsoever, and also keep the building dry and free of water, at all times and under any and all circumstances and contingencies that may arise. C. The Contractor may be required to install well points if subsurface ground water affects the progress of the work. Refer to Specification Section 02140 - Dewatering. 01 19 00 - MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 2.06 CONSTRUCTION LOADS ON BUILDING STRUCTURES A. The structure is adequate to support the loads of the finished building in accordance with its intended occupancy. No analysis has been made for stresses or loads imposed by construction operations or storage. B. If the Contractor intends to subject the building to construction loads in excess of the anticipated loads, he shall submit drawings and calculations, prepared by and bearing the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Indiana, of the proposed method for supporting such loads for the Architect's review and acceptance. No loading of any kind in excess of design loads shall be placed on any part of the building structure prior to Architect's acceptance of submitted drawings and calculations. The costs of the Architect's review shall be borne by the Contractor. 2.07 DAILY CLEANING AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH A. Provide at a convenient location on the project site a trash container of appropriate size and service at appropriate intervals. B. On a daily basis, collect and deposit in the trash container all waste, debris and rubbish, except as noted. C. Collect and promptly remove from the jobsite all liquid waste, and other waste requiring special handling for disposal. D. Hazards Control 1. Store volatile wastes in appropriate containers, and remove from premises daily. 2. Prevent accumulation of wastes, which create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. E. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti- pollution laws. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. 01 19 00 - MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. F. Cleaning Procedures 1. Rubbish shall be removed frequently; daily from the building, at least weekly from the site. 2. No materials shall pass through the finished openings of the exterior walls without proper protection of the openings in a manner approved by the Architect. Hoists and chutes shall be so protected as to prevent damage, staining or marring of any permanent work. 3. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 2.08 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining appropriate safety precautions and shall ensure that those precautions are met. B. Hardhats shall be worn at all times by all personnel while on site. C. The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel on site shall wear the appropriate protective clothing and safety gear. END OF SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. B. Designate in the construction progress schedule the delivery dates for products specified under each allowance. C. Designate in the Schedule of Values the quantities of materials required under each unit cost allowance. 1.02 ALLOWANCES FOR PRODUCTS A. The amount of each allowance includes: 1. The cost of the product to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discounts. 2. Delivery to the site. 3. The amount does not include sales tax. 4. Contractor shall submit documentation for the above costs. B. In addition to the amount of each allowance, include in the Contract Sum the Contractor's costs for: 1. Handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating and storage. 2. Protection from the elements and from damage. 3. Labor for installation and finishing. 4. Other expenses required to complete the installation. 5. Contractor's and Subcontractor's overhead and profit. 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 C. The amount of each allowance: 1. Interior Signage - allow the sum of $5,000.00 for the purchase of interior signage. Installation to be part of base bid. 2. Metal Gable Cross - allow the sum of $15,000.00 for the purchase of Metal Cross. Installation to be part of base bid. 3. Stone Crosses at front gable - allow the sum of $15,000.00 for the purchase of Crosses. Installation to be part of base bid. 4. Sound Absorption – allow the sum of $25,000 for the purchase and installation. 5. Special Sanctuary Lighting - allow the sum of $62,000 for the purchase and installation. 6. Section 09 68 13 Carpet Tile: Allow the sum of $28.00 per square yard for the purchase of carpet tile Type C2 including five percent (5%) waste and overrun. Installation to be part of the base bid. 7. Sanctuary 109 – allow the sum of $800.00 to furnish and install a decorative area at center aisle as coordinated with Architect for Alternates 4 and 5. 1.03 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION A. On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. B. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and samples, as required. C. Make all arrangements for delivery. D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects. E. Submit claims for transportation damage. F. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced specification sections. 1.04 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS A. Should the net cost be more or less than the specified amount of the allowances, the 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 Contract Sum will be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. 1. The amount of the Change Order will recognize any changes in handling costs at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses caused by the selection under the allowance. 2. For products specified under a cost allowance, the unit cost shall apply to the quantities actually used with a nominal allowance for waste, as determined by receipted invoices or by field measurement. B. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs at the site, or other expenses caused by the selection under the allowance, prior to execution of the work. C. Submit documentation for actual additional costs at the site or other expenses caused by the selection under the allowance, within 60 days after completion of the work. D. Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims for additional costs. E. At contract closeout, reflect all approved changes in contract amounts in the final statement of accounting. END OF SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 23 00: ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section identifies each Alternate by number, and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the work, only when that Alternate is made a part of the work by specific provisions in the Construction Contract. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 11 00: Summary of Work B. Section 00 41 00: Bid Form C. Sections of the Specification applicable to the work included under the respective Alternates. 1.03 PERTINENT REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable sections of Specifications stipulate pertinent requirements for products and methods to achieve the work stipulated under each Alternate. B. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the work under each Alternate, and to provide the complete construction required by the Contract Documents. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1: Elevator This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide elevator cab, doors, elevator equipment, and related construction. Base bid to include elevator shaft and pit construction, hoist beam, rough-in conduits, and shaft wall knock-out panels for future installation of elevator cab and doors. 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Alternate #2: Stone Veneer This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide stone veneer to exterior walls of North Transept 110 and South Transept 118 as shown on sheet A200 in lieu of stucco and stone wainscot base bid. C. Alternate #3: Gothic- Arched windows This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide one Aluminum gothic-arched window (type M) and related construction in the East wall of Loft 209. D. Alternate #4:Vinyl Tile Flooring This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide premium vinyl tile flooring in rooms Sanctuary 109, North Transept 110, and South Transept 118 in lieu of stained concrete floor. E. Alternate #5: Porcelain Tile Flooring This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide porcelain tile flooring in rooms Sanctuary 109, North Transept 110, and South Transept 118 in lieu of stained concrete floor. F. Alternate #6: Wainscot This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide and install painted wood wainscot in Sanctuary at North and South walls and walls of Transepts 110 and 118. G. Alternate #7: Casework and countertop This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide stained hardwood casework with quartz stone countertops in rooms Library 107, Kitchenette 205A, and Welcome Center 105 as shown on sheets A410 and A411. Provide rough-in needed for under-counter refrigerator and sink under base bid for items in Kitchenette 205A. H. Alternate #8: Fireplace This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide pre-manufactured, gas-fired, ventless, with gas logs and remote control fireplace in Library 107. Provide 6” x 6” Crossville tile and trim surround to fireplace opening to conceal metal fireplace. Fireplace unit to be radiant clean face model BUF 400 by Martin Hearth and heating. Base bid to include gas line rough-in and drywall knock-out panel for future installation 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 of fireplace. I. Alternate #9: Plaster wall finish This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to provide plaster wall finish over drywall substrate on walls in rooms Sanctuary109, North Transept 110, Chancel 111, South Transept 118, and Loft 209. Please note plaster wall finish is NOT to be painted. J. Alternate #10: Lightning Protection Phase 1 This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to extended Lightning Protection to Phase 1 K. Alternate #11: Lightning Protection Phase 2 This Alternate to include ADD to Base Bid to extended Lightning Protection to Phase 2 1.05 BID FORM A. Fill out the Bid Form completely. Include all required Alternates with this bid. An incomplete Bid Form may be cause for rejection of the bid. B. The Alternate price included in the Bid Form shall include all labor, materials, services, overhead and profit required to provide and install the item described. END OF SECTION 01 29 00 - APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 29 00: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials and services necessary or incidental to the submission of applications for payment in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 00 72 13: General Conditions B. Section 00 73 00: Supplementary Conditions PART 2 - SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO INITIAL APPLICATION A. Prior to submittal of the initial application for payment, the Contractor's shop drawing submittal schedule shall have been submitted to and approved by the Architect. B. Prior to submittal of the initial application for payment, the Contractor's construction schedule shall have been submitted to and approved by the Architect. C. Prior to submittal of the initial application for payment, the Contractor's schedule of values shall have been submitted to and approved by the Architect. Submit on AIA Document G703. Refer to Section 00 72 13: General Conditions, Paragraph 9.2. 2.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED A. The Contractor shall submit itemized applications for payment to the Architect, typed on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, and continuation sheets G703. B. Provide itemized data in accordance with the format, line items and values shown on the Schedule of Values approved by the Architect. All line items shall be divided into material and labor values. 01 29 00 - APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 C. With each Application for Payment, the Contractor shall furnish a sworn statement or certification that each subcontractor and supplier has received his share of previous payments to the Contractor. 2.03 PREPARATION OF PROGRESS PAYMENT APPLICATION A. Fill in total list of all scheduled items of work, with item number and the scheduled dollar value for each item. B. Fill in the dollar value of work performed or products stored for each scheduled item. Round off values to nearest dollar. C. List each Change Order executed prior to the date of submission, at the end of the itemized schedule. List by Change Order number and description. D. Execute certification. 2.04 RETAINAGE A. Progress payment applications shall reflect a ten percent (10%) retainage against the estimated value of work completed and materials stored, through fifty percent (50%) completion of the total project. B. When the estimated value of completed work and materials stored reaches fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Sum and upon presentation by the Contractor of Consent of Surety to Reduction in Retainage, additional retainage may be waived by the Architect in accordance with Section 00 73 00: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 2.05 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments. B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting reflecting all adjustments to the Contract Sum. 2.06 SUBMITTAL, REVIEW AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Applications for progress payments shall be submitted monthly, and shall reflect the value of work completed and materials suitably stored at the site through the last day of the month. 1. Submit three (3) copies of each application. 01 29 00 - APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Submit applications to the Architect not later than the tenth (10th) day of the month following the month covered by the application. C. The Architect will review the application and forward the appropriate Certificate for Payment to the Owner, with a copy to the Contractor, within seven (7) days after receipt of the application from the General Contractor. D. The Owner will make payment to the Contractor within ten (10) days after receipt of the Certificate for Payment from the Architect. E. Payment of the retained percentage shall be made sixty-one (61) days after the date of Substantial Completion, providing all items listed with the Certificate of Substantial Completion have been completed or corrected, and all other requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled. END OF SECTION 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 31 19: PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The General Contractor shall schedule and administer a pre-construction meeting, monthly progress meetings and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES A. General Contractor shall: 1. Prepare an agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting seven (7) days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting. a) Furnish two (2) copies of minutes to the Owner b) Furnish one (1) copy of minutes to the Architect B. Representatives of the contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. C. Architect will attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and the construction schedules. 1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule within ten (10) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Architect. 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Attendance: 1. Owner's representative. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor's project manager and superintendent. 4. Major subcontractors. 5. Major suppliers. 6. Others as appropriate. D. Suggested Agenda: 1. Project coordination: a) Designation of responsible personnel 2. Procedures and processing of: a) Field decisions b) Proposal Requests c) Submittals d) Change Orders e) Applications for Payment 3. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Distribution and discussion of: a) List of major subcontractors and suppliers b) Projected construction schedules 5. Construction Schedule 6. Critical work sequencing. 7. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 8. Use of premises: a) Office, work and storage areas b) Owner's requirements 9. Construction facilities, controls and construction data. 10. Temporary utilities. 11. Security procedures. 12. Housekeeping procedures. 13. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 14. Progress meeting schedule. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings at monthly intervals throughout duration of project. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the work. C. Location of the meetings: The project field office of the Contractor. D. Attendance: 1. Owner's project manager and representative. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor's superintendent. 4. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 5. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 6. Others as appropriate to the agenda. E. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected construction schedule. 7. Revisions to construction schedule. 8. Plan progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules and establish the date and time of next progress meeting. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Review proposed changes for: a) Effect on construction schedule and on completion date. b) Effect on other contracts of the project. 13. Review outstanding Proposal Requests, Change Orders and Pay Requests. 14. Other business. END OF SECTION 01 32 13 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 32 13: CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the provision of construction schedules in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 11 00: Summary of Work 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Day," as used throughout the Contract unless otherwise stated, means "calendar day." 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ a scheduler who is thoroughly trained and experienced in compiling construction schedule data, and in preparing and issuing periodic reports as required below. B. Perform data preparation, analysis, charting, and updating in accordance with standards approved by the Architect. C. Reliance upon the approved schedule: 1. The construction schedule as approved by the Architect will be an integral part of the Contract and will establish interim completion dates for the various activities under the Contract. 2. Should any activity not be completed within fifteen (15) days after the stated scheduled date, the Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to expedite completion of the activity by whatever means the Owner deems appropriate and necessary, without additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. Should any activity be thirty (30) days or more behind schedule, the Owner shall have the right to perform the activity or have the activity performed by whatever method the Owner deems appropriate. 01 32 13 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 4. Costs incurred by the Owner and by the Architect in connection with expediting construction activity under this Article shall be reimbursed by the Contractor. 5. It is expressly understood and agreed that failure by the Owner to exercise the option either to order the Contractor to expedite an activity or to expedite the activity by other means shall not be considered to set a precedent for any other activities. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Preliminary analysis: Within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed or the execution of the Contract, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of a preliminary construction schedule prepared in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. This is deemed to satisfy the time limit established under General Provisions Article 15. C. Construction schedule: Within thirty (30) calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of a revised construction schedule prepared in accordance with Part 3 of this Section. D. Periodic reports: On the first working day of each month following the submittal described in Paragraph 1.03(C) above, submit four (4) prints of the construction schedule updated as described in Part 3 of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION ANALYSIS A. Graphically show by "Critical Path" scheduling the order and interdependence of all activities necessary to complete the work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished, as planned by the Contractor and his project field superintendent in coordination with all subcontractors whose work is shown on the diagram. B. Include, but do not necessarily limit indicated activities to: 1. Project mobilization. 2. Submittal and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples. 01 32 13 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Procurement of equipment and critical materials. 4. Fabrication of special material and equipment, and its installation and testing. 5. Final cleanup. 6. Final inspecting and testing. 7. All activities by the Architect that affect progress, required dates for completion, or both, for all and each part of the work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS A. Contents: 1. Show all activities of the Contractor under this work for the period between receipt of Notice to Proceed and submittal of construction schedule required under Paragraph 1.03(C) above. 2. Show the Contractor's general approach to remainder of the work. 3. Show cost of all activities scheduled for performance before submittal and approval of the construction schedule. B. Submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.03(B) above. 3.02 REVISED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. As soon as practicable after receipt of Notice to Proceed, complete the construction analysis and no later than thirty (30) days, meet with the Architect, review contents of the proposed construction schedule, and make all revisions agreed upon. B. Prior to submittal of the initial application for payment, submit in final form in accordance with Paragraph 1.03(C) above. 3.03 PERIODIC REPORTS A. As required under Paragraph 1.03(D) above, update the approved construction schedule. 1. Indicate "actual" progress in percent completion for each activity. 01 32 13 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Provide written narrative summary of revisions causing delay in the program, and an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed. 3.04 REVISIONS A. Make only those revisions to approved revised construction schedule as are approved in advance by the Architect. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 33 00: SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials and services necessary or incidental for submissions in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 32 13: Construction Schedules B. Section 01 62 00: Product Options and Substitutions C. Sections of the specification applicable to the work included in this section. 1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Submittals not required will not be reviewed by the Architect. B. The Contractor may require his subcontractors to provide drawings, setting diagrams and similar information to help coordinate the Work, but such data shall remain between the Contractor and his subcontractors and will not be reviewed by the Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of Submittals: 1. The Contractor shall promptly prepare a schedule for timely submittal and processing of shop drawings required by the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be distributed to the Architect, the Owner and the subcontractors. This schedule shall list all required submittals by specification section number and shall indicate the week the submittal will occur. Schedule shall be submitted no later than ten (10) days prior to the first application for payment. 2. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted. 3. Verify that each item and the submittal for it conform in all respects with the 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 specified requirements. 4. The General Contractor shall note deviations in the shop drawings from the Contract Documents, informing the Architect in writing, or by markup of the shop drawings, of each deviation at the time of submission. The General Contractor shall inform the Architect in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings, of any revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. 5. The Contractor shall verify and coordinate all field dimensions before shop fabrication of materials, items, products or equipment. 6. Each drawing, brochure or schedule shall bear the following wording typed or stamped theron: “APPROVED TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS EXCEPT AS NOTED” SIGNED:________________________________DATED:_________________ The above approval shall be signed and dated by the Contractor. 7. By affixing the Contractor's signature and date to each submittal, He certifies the above noted coordination has been performed. Submittals not signed and stamped by the Contractor will be immediately returned, unreviewed, to the Contractor by the Architect. 8. The Architect shall notify the Contractor in writing if certain shop drawings must be held for correlation with shop drawings of related items. 9. Neither the Contractor nor the Architect shall initiate changes to the Contract Documents by making corrections to the shop drawings. B. Substitutions: 1. Substitutions will be considered as outlined in Section 01 62 00 - Product Options and Substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Scale and measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work. 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Types of prints required: 1. Submit Shop Drawings in the form of two (2) blackline prints of each sheet. C. Review comments of the Architect will be shown on the print when it is returned to the Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute such copies as are required for his purposes. 2.02 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal, clearly show which portions of the contents is being submitted for review. B. Submit the number of copies which are required to be returned, plus five (5) copies which will be retained by the Architect and Architect's consultants. 2.03 SAMPLES A. Provide sample or samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. Identify as described under "Identification of Submittals" below. B. Number of samples required: 1. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples in the quantity, which is required to be returned, plus two (2), which will be retained by the Architect. 2. By prearrangement in specific cases, a single sample may be submitted for review and, when approved, be installed in the Work at a location agreed upon by the Architect. 2.04 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically called out in the Contract Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified products, submit accurate color and pattern charts or physical samples to the Architect for selection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Consecutively number all submittals. 1. When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter of transmittal and with a new transmittal number. 2. On resubmittals, cite the original submittal number for reference. B. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal showing all information required for identification and checking. C. On at least the first page of each submittal, and elsewhere as required for positive identification, show the submittal number in which the item was included. D. Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the Work, showing current status of all submittals at all times. Make the submittal log available to the Architect for his review upon request. E. All submittals shall repeat the identification shown on the Contract Drawings and shall be identified by specification section number. 3.02 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS A. Unless otherwise specified, make submittals in groups containing all associated items to assure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. 3.03 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery. B. In scheduling, allow ten (10) working days for review by the Architect following his receipt of the submittal. 3.04 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Review by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors, which may exist in the submitted data. The Architect will not review quantities required. B. Revisions: 1. Make revisions required by the Architect. 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS PAGE 5 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 2. If the Contractor considers any required revision to be a change, he shall notify the Architect. 3. Make only those revisions directed or approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION 01 45 24 - TESTING AGENCY SERVICES (BY CONTRACTOR) PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 45 24: TESTING AGENCY SERVICES (BY CONTRACTOR) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and observation. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the Testing Agency to facilitate the execution of its required services. 2. Employment of the Testing Agency shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the work of the Contract. B. Testing agency inspection, sampling, testing and observation is required for: 1. Section 31 23 00: Earthwork 2. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry 4. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing 5. Section 23 05 93: Testing and Balancing of Air Systems 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 00 72 13: General Conditions B. Respective Sections: 1. Certification of Products 2. Laboratory tests required and standards for testing 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF TESTING AGENCY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. 01 45 24 - TESTING AGENCY SERVICES (BY CONTRACTOR) PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E-329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction". C. Authorized to operate in the state in which the project is located. D. Submit a copy of the report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. E. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a) National Bureau of Standards b) Accepted values of natural physical constants 1.04 TESTING AGENCY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction: 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities of deficiencies of work or products. D. Prepare written report of each test and inspection. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing agency name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of testing agency inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 01 45 24 - TESTING AGENCY SERVICES (BY CONTRACTOR) PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect. E. Promptly, but never more than 5 days after sampling or testing, distribute written reports of each test and inspection as follows: Owner (one (1) copy), Architect (one (1) copy), Contractor (two (2) copies, including one (1) copy for Record Documents File). F. Perform additional tests as required by Architect or Owner. 1.05 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING AGENCY A. Testing Agency is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with testing agency personnel, provide access to work, to manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the testing agency adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. C. Provide to the testing agency the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. 01 45 24 - TESTING AGENCY SERVICES (BY CONTRACTOR) PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Furnish copies of product test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. F. Notify laboratory at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests by testing agency. G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with Contract Documents. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 See respective Sections for testing requirements. END OF SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 50 00: TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the provision of temporary facilities and controls in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 51 00: Temporary Utilities B. Section 01 52 13: Field Offices and Sheds 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY SITE AND BUILDING ACCESS A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all facilities required for temporary general site and building access. B. If required for proper prosecution of work, temporary staging areas shall be provided by the Contractor and removed prior to final grading. 2.02 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS AND MEASURES A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins, canopies, warning signs, steps, platforms, bridges and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work in compliance with pertinent safety and other regulations. B. Protection of Finished Surfaces: 1. Finish Surfaces: Protect all finished surfaces, including the jambs, sills and soffits of all openings used as passageways or through which materials are 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 handled, against any possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work. a) The finished surfaces shall be clean and unmarred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace, repair or refinish (as determined by the Architect) all such spaces where painted or finished surfaces prove to have been inadequately protected and are damaged during prosecution of the work. C. Materials stored and finished surfaces: Provide tight, non-staining wood sheathing under any materials that are stored on finished surfaces and provide planking on finished surfaces before moving any materials over those finished areas. D. Roof and waterproof surfaces: Roof and waterproof surfaces shall not be subjected to traffic nor shall they be used for storage or material. Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the work, adequate temporary protection shall be provided. E. Glass: All glass shall be protected and kept clean during the entire construction period. If damage to glass results from construction operations, replacement shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Glass damage due to vandalism during the construction period shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 2.03 TEMPORARY SHORING, BRACING AND SCAFFOLDING A. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, scaffolding and platforms adequate to accommodate all loading to which it may be subjected (and be self-supporting and self-bracing). B. Scaffolding shall have a minimum 4'- 0" wide solid planked working levels completely serving the work. These levels shall occur at maximum intervals of 8'- 0". All working levels shall be continuously planked and provided with guard rails, toeboards and safe access during the life of the scaffold. C. Mobile or rolling scaffolding shall be designed such that it presents a stable-working platform during the time that any workers or other personnel are on it. Scaffolding shall not be relocated or otherwise moved while personnel are on it, unless it is designed expressly for that purpose (e.g. mobile lifts, cherry pickers, etc.). All mobile or rolling scaffolding shall be operated and maintained in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and OSHA requirements. D. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 E. Maintain all facilities and equipment in a first-class condition. 2.04 BARRIERS A. Furnish, install and maintain suitable barriers as required to prevent public entry and to protect the work, existing facilities, trees and plants from construction operations; remove when no longer needed or at completion of work. B. Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. C. Install facilities of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for the required purposes. D. Maintain barriers during entire construction period. E. Relocate barriers as required by progress of construction. F. Removal: 1. Completely remove barriers, including foundations, when construction has progress to the point that they are not longer needed. 2. Clean and repair damage caused by installation, fill and grade the areas of the site to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. 2.05 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure of exterior walls for successive areas of the building as work progresses, as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions. Provide weather protection for interior materials, allow for effective temporary heating and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. 2.06 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants at the site and those adjacent to the site. 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Consult with Architect and remove agreed on roots and branches which interfere with construction. Employ qualified tree surgeon to remove and to treat cuts. C. Protect root zones of trees and plants by: 1. Not allowing vehicular traffic or parking on top of root zones. 2. Not storing materials or products on top of root zones. 3. Preventing puddling or continuous running water on top of root zones. D. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations, to prevent damage. E. Replace, or suitably repair, trees and plants designated to remain which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations. 2.07 PROJECT SIGN A. The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain one project sign, 4' high x 8 long, constructed of 3/4" exterior grade A-C plywood, properly mounted, framed and painted. 1. All lumber, plywood, trim, bracing and posts shall be primed and painted with two (2) coats of exterior paint. 2. The information appearing on the sign shall identify: a) The project. b) The Owner. c) The Architect and his consultants. d) The Contractor. Exact layout and colors will be as determined by the Architect. Layout will include the Building. A maximum of four (4) colors will be used on the sign. 3. Sign shall be located as directed by the Architect. 4. The Contractor shall remove construction sign from site when directed by the Architect. 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 B. The Contractor may display signage on the field office(s) or shed(s). The Contractor must remove all signage at project completion. 2.08 FIELD ENGINEERING A. The Contractor shall provide appropriate base lines and bench marks at each level of the building. B. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for the layout of his work and the coordination of his work with other trades. C. Each Subcontractor shall field verify all dimensions relating to his work, as shown on the Drawings, and report any errors to the Contractor before commencing work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the work. B. Remove such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the work will permit or as directed by the Architect. END OF SECTION 01 51 00 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 51 00: TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the provision of temporary utilities in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls B. Section 01 52 13: Field Offices and Sheds 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility company requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. Contractor to provide temporary service [from campus utilities and metering]. B. Install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution boxes located so that power and lighting is available throughout the construction by the use of construction-type power cords. C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not adequate for work and for areas accessible to the public. 01 51 00 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Owner to pay for cost of electricity consumed during construction. Temporary power to be pulled from Owner’ existing service. 2.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the work, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases. C. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls. D. Pay all costs of installation, maintenance, operation and removal and for fuel consumed. E. The new permanent heating system and its component parts may be used for temporary heat only with the written permission of the Owner, indicating the conditions whereby it may be used. 1. Warranty period for the permanent HVAC system shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion. 2.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE A. The Contractor shall arrange to provide telephone service at the project site for the use of its employees. 2.05 TEMPORARY WATER A. The Contractor shall arrange to provide water for construction purposes [from campus utilities and metering]. B. Install branch piping with taps located so that water is available throughout the construction by the use of hoses. Protect piping and fittings against freezing. C. Owner to pay for cost of water used during construction. Temporary water to be pulled from Owners existing service. 01 51 00 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 2.06 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. Existing facilities shall not be used. B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 22 - PLUMBING and in Division 26 - ELECTRICAL. B. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. C. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires. 3.02 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition. 1. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps. END OF SECTION 01 52 13 - FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 52 13: FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary field offices during the entire construction period. B. Furnish, install and maintain storage and work sheds needed for construction. C. At completion of work, remove field offices sheds and contents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls B. Section 01 51 00: Temporary Utilities 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with requirements of Federal, State and local codes and regulations. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR FACILITIES A. Construction: 1. Structurally sound, weathertight with floors raised above ground. 2. Thermal insulation: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. 3. At Contractor's option, portable or mobile buildings may be used. B. Contractor's Field Office: 1. Size: As required for use of Contractor and Architect's site visits. 2. Provide adequate heating and cooling, light, ventilation and telephone. 3. Equip with suitable furnishings, including desks, chairs, plan rack, plan table, file cabinets, conference table and chairs to accommodate eight (8) people, fire 01 52 13 - FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 extinguishers and at least one (1) direct line. C. Each major Subcontractor may, at his discretion and with the Contractor's approval, provide, furnish and maintain for his own use, a temporary field office located on the site as directed by the Contractor. D. Offices shall be relocated, if necessary, as directed by the Contractor. 1.05 USE OF PERMANENT FACILITIES A. The permanent facilities of the project shall not be used for field offices. B. Permanent facilities may be used for storage only with the prior written permission of the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS A. May be new or used, but must be serviceable, presentable and adequate for the required purpose. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide surface drainage. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Construct temporary field offices and storage sheds on proper foundations and provide connections for utility services. B. Secure portable or mobile buildings when used. C. Provide steps and landings at entrance doors. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. Provide periodic maintenance and cleaning for temporary structures, furnishings and equipment. 01 52 13 - FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 3.04 REMOVAL A. Remove temporary field offices, contents and services when no longer needed. B. Remove storage sheds when no longer needed. C. Remove foundations and debris. D. Grade the site to required elevations and clean the areas. END OF SECTION 01 56 00 - BARRIERS PAGE 1 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 56 00: BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain suitable barriers as required to prevent public entry, and to protect the work, existing facilities, trees and plants from construction operations; remove when no longer needed, or at completion of work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with federal, state and local codes and regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install facilities of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for the required purposes. B. Maintain barriers during entire construction period. C. Relocate barriers as required by progress of construction. 3.02 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants at the site which are designated to remain, and those adjacent to the site. 01 56 00 - BARRIERS PAGE 2 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Consult with Architect and remove agreed-on roots and branches, which interfere with construction. 1. Employ qualified tree surgeon to remove and to treat cuts. C. Provide temporary barriers to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees and plants. D. Protect root zones of trees and plants: 1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking. 2. Do not store materials or products. 3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water. E. Carefully supervise excavating, grading, filling, and subsequent construction operations, to prevent damage. F. Replace, or suitably repair, trees and plants designated to remain which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations. 3.03 REMOVAL A. Completely remove barricades, including foundations, when construction has progressed to the point that they are no longer needed and when approved by Architect. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation, fill and grade the areas of the site to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. END OF SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 60 00: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work shall: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Architect. 3. Manufacturer and fabricated products: a) Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. b) Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. c) Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. d) Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e) Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified. 1.02 Related Requirements Specified in Other Sections A. Section 00 72 13: General Conditions B. Section 01 33 00: Submittals C. Section 01 62 00: Product Options and Substitutions D. Section 01 77 00: Project Closeout 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to Architect. 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the jobsite during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules and coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. B. Exterior Storage: 1. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, to prevent soiling or staining. Cover products, which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 2. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. D. Protection After Installation: 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage due to traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed. END OF SECTION 01 62 00 - PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 62 00: PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes product options available to the Contractor and procedures for securing approval of proposed substitutions. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 00 72 13: General Conditions B. Section 01 33 00: Submittals C. Section 01 60 00: Product Requirements 1.03 OPEN COMPETITION A. Where in these Specifications one or more certain materials, trade names, or articles of certain manufacture are mentioned, it is done for the express purpose of establishing a basis of durability and efficiency and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Other names or materials can be used, if in the opinion of the Architect they are comparable in design and function and are equal in durability and efficiency to those mentioned and of a design in harmony within the work as outlined and the Architect gives written approval of a substitution before the articles and material are ordered by the Contractor. The Contract is based on standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1.04 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. The Contract is based on standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. In agreeing to the terms and conditions of the Contract, the Contractor has accepted a responsibility to verify that the specified products will be available and to place orders for all required materials in such a timely manner as is needed to meet his agreed construction schedule. 2. Neither the Owner nor the Architect has agreed to the substitution of materials or methods called for in the Contract Documents, except as they may specifically otherwise state in writing. 01 62 00 - PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Materials and/or methods specified by name: 1. Where materials and/or methods are specified by naming one single manufacturer and/or model number, without stating that equal products will be considered, only the material and/or method named is approved for incorporation into the work. 2. Should the Contractor demonstrate to the approval of the Architect that a specified material or method was ordered in a timely manner and will not be available in time for incorporation into this work, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect such data on proposed substitute materials and/or methods as are needed to help the Architect determine suitability of the propose substitution. C. Where materials and/or methods are specified by name and/or model number, followed by the words "or equal", "or an equal approved in advance by the Architect": 1. The material and/or method specified by name establishes the required standard of quality. 2. Materials and/or methods proposed by the Contractor to be used in lieu of materials and/or methods so specified by name shall in all ways equal or exceed the qualities of the named materials and/or methods. 3. Proposed substitutions shall be submitted for approval per the requirements of Section 01 21 00 - Instruction to the Bidders. D. The following products do not require further approval except for interface within the work: 1. Products specified by reference to standard specifications such as ASTM and similar standards. 2. Products specified by manufacturer's name and catalog model number. E. Where the phrase "or equal", or "or equal as approved by the Architect", occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that the materials, equipment or methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically so approved for this work by the Architect. F. The decision of the Architect shall be final. 01 62 00 - PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 1.05 REIMBURSEMENT OF ARCHITECT'S COSTS A. In the event substitutions are proposed to the Architect after the Contract has been awarded, the Architect will record all time used by the Architect and the Architect's consultants in evaluating each such proposed substitution. B. Upon receipt of the Architect's billing, the Contractor shall promptly reimburse the Architect, whether the proposed substitution is approved or not approved. The Architect shall bill for reimbursement at a rate two and one-half times the direct cost for all time, cost plus 10% for all costs related to evaluating the proposed substitution. END OF SECTION 01 71 23 - FIELD ENGINEERING PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 71 23: FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services including, but not limited to the following: 1. Land survey work. 2. Staking and layout of construction work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name and qualifications of Surveyor prior to commencing work. [B. Submit a mylar reproducible of the Final Survey, for Project Record Drawings, certified and signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer.] 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the State of the Project Site to perform the required land-surveying services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ( Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on 01 71 23 - FIELD ENGINEERING PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 the original survey control points. B. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, reference to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C. Existing utilities and equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. 1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water service piping. 3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. B. Surveyor’s Log: Maintain a surveyor’s log of control and other survey Work. Make this log available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. [2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other Work requiring field engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and sitework.] C. Surveyor to accurately locate building lines and elevations for structures, foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical Work. 01 71 23 - FIELD ENGINEERING PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. [E. Final Survey: Before Substantial Completion, prepare a final Record Survey showing AS BUILT conditions. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the Surveyor certifying the AS BUILT conditions.] END OF SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 73 29: CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the provision of cutting and patching in accordance with the Contract Documents, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation or inspection, or both, of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 00 72 13: General Conditions 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to other requirements specified, uncover work upon the Architect's request to provide for inspection by the Architect of covered work, and remove samples of installed materials for testing. B. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contracts without the Architect's written permission. C. Demolition and cutting of portions of existing building structure or finish work is specified in another section. 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. The work of the Owner. 2. The structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 3. The integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 4. The efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. The visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. B. The request shall include: 1. Identification of the project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner or on the structural or weatherproof integrity of the Project. 5. Description of the proposed work: a) The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b) The trades who will execute the work. c) Products proposed to be used. d) The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. C. Submit a written notice to the Architect designating the date and the time the work will be undertaken. 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value or integrity of the affected portion of the work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. B. Execute excavating and backfilling methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. C. Employ the original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. D. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. E. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. END OF SECTION 01 74 23 - CLEANING PAGE 1 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 74 23: CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all final cleaning in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 01 77 00: Project Closeout 1.03 STANDARD A. Upon substantial completion of the project, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the project in its entirety, leaving it in new condition and fully ready for use without further cleaning. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 CLEANING A. Cleaning shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Wash all glass and light diffuser assemblies, both inside and outside. Follow recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association and manufacturer. 2. Remove dirt, dust, stains, fingerprints and other soil from finished surfaces. 3. Clean and polish hardware, specialties and equipment. 4. Polish hard surface floors. Vacuum carpets and mats. 5. Clean site and cleanup debris off site, which resulted from construction. 6. In addition to cleaning exposed surfaces, clean surfaces not ordinarily visible, such as tops of ducts, insides of convectors, insides of cabinets, tops of doorframes, and equipment in mechanical spaces. 01 74 23 - CLEANING PAGE 2 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Clean up shall extend into those portions of the building where no work has been done, but where, due to inadequate protection and dust control, clean up is necessary. C. When workmen perform work after Substantial Completion, clean up immediately afterwards. D. If surfaces cannot be restored to new condition by cleaning, repaint or replace them as directed by Architect. E. Materials 1. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. 2. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. F. Procedures 1. Employ experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. 2. Maintain cleaning until project is occupied by Owner. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 77 00: PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials and services necessary or incidental to the completion of project closeout in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 00 72 13: General Conditions B. Section 01 79 00: Systems Demonstrations PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one (1) record copy of: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the contract. 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. B. Maintenance of documents and samples: 1. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. a) Provide files and racks for storage of documents. b) Provide locked cabinets or secure storage space for storage of samples. 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. 3. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect and Owner's representative. C. Recording 1. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. 2. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. 3. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction. a) Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. b) Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. c) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. d) Field changes of dimension and detail. e) Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. f) Details not on original Contract Drawings. 4. Specifications: Legibly mark to record actual installed material if the specified item has been substituted with an alternate as permitted by Section 01 62 00 Product Options and Substitutions. D. Reproducible record drawings: 1. At the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall provide a complete set of mylar reproducible prints made from the original Contract Drawings, including architectural, structural, mechanical, fire protection and electrical drawings. 2. The Contractor shall carefully, accurately and completely transfer all markings, additions, deletions, and revisions from the Project Record Drawings to the mylar reproducible prints, with each marking clearly distinguishable from the original information. 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Label each print "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters, and date as of the date of Substantial Completion. 4. The Contractor shall provide a complete set of prints and a CD or DVD with PDF files of “Project Record”. Drawings, including architectural. Civil, structural , mechanical, fire protection and electrical. E. Submittals 1. At Contract close-out, deliver Record Documents, including mylar reproducible, to Architect for the Owner. 2. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: a) Date. b) Project title and number. c) Contractor's name and address. d) Title and number of each Record Document. e) Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. 2.02 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Provide three (3) complete sets of printed operating instructions and parts list for all operating general, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, and control equipment and other manufactured items. 1. The operating instructions shall integrate each piece of equipment in any one system into a numbered step-by-step sequence of operation. 2. The maintenance manuals shall include an exploded view and a parts list, with all component parts numbered, of each item of operating or expendable equipment. 3. Electrical manuals shall also contain an approved copy of each shop drawing. B. Additional operating instruction and maintenance manuals' requirements are specified in their respective sections or divisions. C. Include copies of all required manufacturer's or installers warranties. D. Operating and maintenance data submittals shall be reviewed and accepted by the Architect prior to processing final application for payment. 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 E. Each subcontractor shall train the maintenance personnel designated by the Owner in the operation and maintenance of all equipment installed by the subcontractor. 2.03 PUNCHLIST A. The purposes of a punchlist shall be to assure the Owner and the Architect that all incorrect work will be corrected with reasonable promptness and in accordance with the contract documents and to provide the Contractor with a positive incentive to perform work promptly knowing this will ensure prompt payment in full. It is not the purpose of a punchlist to provide the Contractor with a list of items to be completed. B. The Contractor shall carefully check the work as it is being performed. C. Unsatisfactory work shall be corrected immediately and not be permitted to remain and become a part of the punchlist. D. Prior to, but no later than this substantial completion inspection, dates shall be established for equipment testing and instructional requirements not previously completed or agreed upon. E. Following the substantial completion inspection and preparation of the punchlist, a meeting shall be held between the Contractor and Architect to discuss any question concerning what is required to be done before the work can be accepted as complete. The Contractor shall respond promptly in completing the punchlist work. F. The Architect shall advise the Owner on the value of the work not completed. G. If the Owner, or a separate contractor installing Owner's equipment or furnishings, damages work which has been satisfactorily completed, the Owner shall have the responsibility to repair such damaged work. If the Owner wishes to have the Contractor repair such damaged work or perform maintenance work not called for in the contract, the Contractor shall be paid for such work. END OF SECTION 01 79 00 - SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION PAGE 1 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 01 79 00: SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Instruction requirements. 2. Facilities and equipment. B. Related documents and sections: 1. Section 01 77 00: Contract Closeout. 2. Individual sections requiring instruction: minimum hours of instruction, number of personnel to be instructed. 1.02 INSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide instruction of Owner's personnel when specified in individual section. Section will indicate training requirements including, but not limited to: 1. Number of personnel to be instructed. 2. Minimum number of hours of instruction. B. Provide a qualified manufacturer's representative to do the instructing. C. Contractor will give Owner at least fourteen (14) days advance written notice of the date instruction is to begin. All instruction is to occur within twenty-one (21) days of Substantial Completion. D. Unless otherwise indicated, instruction shall occur at the project site. E. The Contractor shall videotape all training sessions and leave one (1) copy of the training tapes with the Institution. F. All attendees are to sign-in. 1.03 FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT 01 79 00 - SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION PAGE 2 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Provide training materials and texts necessary to train Department personnel to operate and maintain equipment and systems. Furnish training materials and texts to Institution at the end of the instruction period. Provide copy of transmittal to Architect. B. Owner will provide room, tables and chairs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not used. END OF SECTION 02 32 00: GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PAGE 1 OF 1 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 02 32 00: GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The attached record of subsurface investigation and boring log was prepared by Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. on June 14, 2000. This record is offered as information to the Contractors. B. Soil investigation data is provided only for information and convenience of Bidders. The Owner and the Architect disclaim any responsibility for the accuracy, true location and extent of the soils investigation that has been prepared by others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of that data by Bidders, as in projecting soil- bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability and the presence, level and extent of underground water. C. Soil investigation data is not part of the Contract Documents. Bidders are urged to examine soils investigation data and to make their own investigation of the site before bidding. PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not used. PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not used. END OF SECTION Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. 4105 West 99th Street • Carmel, Indiana 46032 (317) 875-7000 • Fax (317) 876-3705 Offices: Cincinnati, Ohio • Dayton, Ohio Indianapolis • Evansville • Ft. Wayne • Lafayette • South Bend • Terre Haute, Indiana Subsurface Investigation and Foundation Engineering Construction Materials Testing and Inspection Environmental Services 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 02 41 19: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and apparatus whether necessary or incidental for the completion of all selective demolition specified herein and indicated on the Contract Documents. B. Adequately and completely protect those portions of the existing structure which are to remain. C. Provide temporary shoring and stabilizing members as required before, during, and after demolition and prior to completion of new construction. D. Certain items listed in this section or identified as "to be removed by Owner" are not a part of the work. 1.02 EXAMINATION OF BUILDING AND DOCUMENTS A. Carefully examine the building to become familiar with existing conditions, and to verify all information regarding materials and quantities to be removed as shown on the Drawings. B. Existing conditions which differ from the Contractor's understanding of those conditions at time of bidding will not be considered justification for additional compensation unless, in the opinion of the Architect, the true nature of the existing condition could not have been ascertained by careful examination of the building. C. Openings which are cut through existing construction and are required only for the execution of the demolition work shall be rebuilt to equal the condition of the original construction immediately following completion of the demolition work. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection 1. Erect barriers, fences, guardrails, enclosures, chutes and shoring to protect personnel, windows, structures and utilities remaining intact. 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Provide dust partitions to seal off occupied areas of the building. Cover air grilles to prevent dust from entering other areas of the building. 3. Do not use jackhammers or other types of equipment that may cause cracking or damage to stone or plaster in other areas. 4. Protect trees and plants from damage. B. Maintaining Traffic 1. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways, sidewalks and adjacent facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets or passageways without permission from the Owner. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 DEMOLITION A. Demolish all parts of the structure indicated to be demolished and as required for completion of the project. B. Prevent movement and settlement of portions of structures not to be demolished. Provide all bracing to prevent wind damage to existing structure and utilities scheduled to remain. C. Provide adequate shoring under any structural member or portion of building which will be weakened or overloaded during demolition and construction procedures. Where structural integrity of the building is threatened by removal of walls or portions thereof, the shoring shall be designed by a structural engineer registered in the State of Indiana. D. Shoring shall remain in place until the shored member is sufficiently strengthened to support the superimposed loads, including live loads, or until the overloading condition is removed. E. Remove existing wall, floor and ceiling finishes and trim on construction to remain which interferes with the installation of new work. Surfaces which are exposed by removal of existing equipment or construction and will remain exposed in the completed work shall be patched, repaired or rebuilt as required, to a condition equal to similar exposed surfaces in the same area. 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 F. Exercise special care in removal of existing construction above or adjacent to portions which are to remain intact. Remove such construction by cutting into sections of manageable size and supporting each section as it is removed in a manner, which will avoid damage to parts, which remain permanently. G. All mechanical and electrical installations, which are abandoned in place, shall be properly capped, sealed and otherwise treated to avoid any hazard to or detrimental influence on new construction and existing construction to remain. H. Repair any damage resulting from demolition operations. Includes damage to adjacent properties and to parts of the existing building which are to remain intact. 2.02 DUST AND NOISE ABATEMENT A. Exercise all precautions to keep dust from circulating and contaminating other areas of the building or adjacent environs. B. Select and use power equipment to offer the least possible interference caused by airborne noise to the remainder of the building and surrounding environs. C. During the entire period of work, keep the site and all material being loaded for disposal sprinkled to reduce airborne dust. 1. Do not use water to the extent, which will cause flooding, contaminated runoff, or icing. 2. Do not use water for dust control if such use risks damage to portions of building to remain. 2.03 SALVAGE A. Except as otherwise noted, all salvage materials shall become the property of this Contractor. B. Certain items will be removed by the Owner's own forces prior to construction or as required by the Construction Schedule. Coordinate removal of such items with the Owner. 1. Any items indicated on the Drawings "to be removed by Owner". 2.07 DISPOSAL 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Remove demolition debris as soon as practicable. B. All demolition debris shall be properly and legally disposed of off site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION SEC 02 71 00 – FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 02 71 00: FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Section 02200: Earthwork 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide foundation drainage system as shown and indicated on drawings. Foundation drainage work includes the following: 1. Footing drainage system. 2. Floor drainage system. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Submit Certification signed by Contractor and foundation drainage system Installer that installed materials conform to specified requirements and system was successfully checked and tested prior to covering with filtering and drainage fill. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Furnish drainage pipe complete with bends, reducers, adapters, couplings, collars, and joint materials. B. Porous Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 654, "Standard-Strength". C. Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ANSI/ASTM D 2729. D. Slotted Corrugated 2.02 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE MAT A. General: Provide prefabricated in-plane wall drainage matting as part of overall SEC 02 71 00 – FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 foundation drainage system. B. Drainage Core: Manufacturer's standard three-dimensional, non-biodegradable, plastic material designed to effectively conduct water to foundation drainage system. C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard non-woven geotextile fabric of polypropylene or polyester fibers, or a combination thereof. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: "Amerdrain 360"; American Wick Drain Corp. "Enkadrain 9010 or 9020"; American Enka Co. "Miradrain"; Mirafi, Inc. "Erolan"; Armortec, Inc. 2.03 SOIL MATERIALS A. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense composite. B. Drainage Fill: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone, and natural sand with 100% passing a 1/2" sieve and 0-5% passing a No. 50 sieve. C. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone, and natural sand, with 100% passing a 1-1/2" sieve and 0-5% passing a No. 50 sieve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Underfloor Drainage System: Excavate for underfloor drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but before drainage fill course has been placed. Provide a clear horizontal distance between drain pipe and trench wall on both sides not less than 2 times diameter of drain pipe, unless otherwise shown. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to a firm, solid bed for drain system. 1. Apply and compact impervious fill material to raise low areas or where unsatisfactory bearing soil may occur. B. Impervious Fill at Footings: After concrete footings have been cured and forms removed, place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 6" deep and 12" wide. SEC 02 71 00 – FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Filtering Materials: Place supporting layer of filtering material over compacted subgrade where drainage pipe is to be laid to depth indicated or, if not indicated, to a compacted depth of not less than 4". After testing drain lines, place additional filtering material to a 4" depth around sides and top of drains. D. Laying Drain Pipe: Lay drain pipe solidly bedded in filtering material. Provide full bearing for each pipe section throughout its length, to true grades and alignment, and continuous slope in direction of flow. E. Testing Drain Lines: Test or check lines before backfilling to assure free flow. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and retest system until satisfactory. F. Drainage Fill: Place drainage fill over drain lines after satisfactory testing and covering of drain lines with filtering material. Completely cover drain lines to a width of at least 6" on each side and above top of pipe to within 12" of finish grade. Place fill material in layers not exceeding 3" in loose depth and compact each layer placed. 1. Overlay drainage fill material with one layer of 15-lb. asphalt or tar saturated felt or synthetic drainage fabric, overlapping edges at least 4". G. Fill to Grade: Apply impervious fill material over compacted drainage fill at footing drains, placing material in layers not exceeding 6" in loose depth and thoroughly compacting each layer. Carry impervious fill to indicated finish elevations and slope away from building perimeter. END OF SECTION St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Information to be submitted for each type and strength shall include the following items: 1. Sources of concrete mix design components including coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, cement, water, admixtures, and pozzolans where included. 2. Concrete mix design – Concrete proportions shall be established based on the requirements of ACI 301, latest edition. 3. Laboratory sieve analysis and mechanical properties for coarse and aggregate. 4. Admixture types and chemical compositions. (Include certification of compliance with ASTM reference standards and confirmation of any supplementary requirements included in these Specifications). 5. Where pozzolans are used in combination with Type I cement, provide laboratory test results to certify compliance with ASTM reference standards and supplementary requirements included in these Specifications. 6. Field strength data to show proposed concrete mix designs will produce the required f’c. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-2 C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. Reinforcing shall be fabricated and placed only from drawings bearing the final stamp of approval of the Engineer. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. Submit shop drawings when requested by the Engineer. 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring. E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Fiber reinforcement. 5. Admixtures. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing materials. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Epoxy joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed unless concrete will be exposed to view. b. Exposed to view: Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4 D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed where rebar is to be welded. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type III. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. D. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5 1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: not to exceed maximum size permitted by ACI 301. 2. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50. E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water- soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. 2.7 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Chemical curing compounds: Verify compatibility of curing compound with other coatings, sealers, paints or adhesives to be applied to the concrete. 1. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 3. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 4. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 5. Non-membrane forming curing compound: Sonocil; Sonneborn ChemRex, Inc. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips for Unsealed, Exterior Joints: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Joint-Filler Strips for Sealed, Interior Joints: closed cell polyethylene, 25% compression deflection @ 10-15 psi pressure. C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.053 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. 2. Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump. D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. E. Foundation Walls and Piers: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi. 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. G. Submit field data showing that the proposed mix designs will produce the minimum required concrete strength. In the absence of such field data, water/cement ratios shall not exceed the following: Minimum 28 Day Maximum Compressive Strength Water/Cement Ratio (psi) (by weight) 4,000 psi AE 0.35 4,000 psi 0.44 3,000 psi AE 0.46 3,000 psi 0.58 H. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for concrete exposed to deicers or subject to freezing and thawing while moist. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-8 I. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. J. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. K. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. L. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. M. Aggregates: The proportion of fine aggregate to total aggregate shall fall within the limits of 35% and 45% unless otherwise expressly permitted by the Engineer. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-10 A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide for and cooperate with other contractors in the installation of conduit boxes, sleeves, inserts, hangers, etc., required for their work; forms shall be cut out and framed as necessary for the installation of the work of other trades. At the same time, it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to prevent groupings of sleeves or pipes through structural members, or cut outs not shown on the Drawings, which may affect the safety of the structure. When such problems arise, he shall immediately notify the Engineer for resolution. The same course shall be followed for pipes or sleeves, of whatever size, through beams and through slabs. Gauge metal sleeves may be used in slabs only where the Engineer’s approval is given. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301. 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-11 3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. C. Shores and other supports shall not be removed until concrete has attained sufficient strength to support without objectionable deflection its own weight plus all anticipated construction loads. The Contractor shall bear the full responsibility of this operation. Concrete damaged from too early removal of shores shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer or replaced. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with ½” thick layer of fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Every bar shall be wired securely into position. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Reinforcing shall be set accurately in position according to the Drawings and placing plans. Every bar shall be wired securely in design position. Before concrete is placed, reinforcing shall be carefully checked and all bars displaced or bent during the course of the work shall be fully restored to their intended shape and position. There shall be no heating of bars for bending on the job. Beam, joist or slab bars hooked for anchorage in beams, walls or columns shall be positioned so that there is the minimum specified clearance between the hook and the far face of the beam, wall or column. E. Concrete cover for reinforcing bars shall conform to the minimum requirements of the ACI-318. latest edition. F. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-12 G. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one and one-half mesh spacing or 12” minimum. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. Welded wire fabric in slabs on grade shall be placed such that it’s final position is at the mid-depth of the slab thickness. During the course of the concrete slab placement, welded wire fabric shall be pulled up from the bottom of the slab to the mid-depth with a hooked hand tool, specifically designed for this purpose. Welded wire fabric shall be provided in flat sheets and not continuous rolls whenever possible. H. Place an equivalent area of steel to that interrupted by an opening, pipe penetration, electrical conduit group or duct penetration around the opening or penetration. The bars shall have sufficient length to develop bond at each end beyond the opening or penetration. I. No reinforcing bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection unless specifically called for on the Drawings, specified herein, or with prior written approval of the Engineer. All bars that have been welded, including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately removed from the work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called for it shall conform to the AWS Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4. J. Tension lap splices shall be Class B lap splices, as defined in latest issue of ACI 318 unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Mechanical connectors shall not be used for reinforcing bar splices unless prior written approval is obtained from the Engineer. Mechanical connectors shall develop at least 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved in writing by Engineer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Joints shall not exceed 15’ on center. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-13 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Slabs on grade, walls or pavement shall be constructed on compacted fill. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved in writing by the Engineer. D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. E. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation from rehandling and flowing; vibrators shall not be used to move concrete. Placing and vibrating shall be regulated so that concrete is plastic at all times, flowing readily around the reinforcement and into the form’s corners. No concrete partially hardended or contaminated by foreign material shall be used. F. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 18 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-14 G. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. H. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. I. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-15 C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete (stadium seating concrete): 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull- floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Carpeted floors: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15. b. Thin-set flooring or resilient floor covering for slabs-on-grade: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-16 c. Thin-set flooring or resilient floor covering for suspended slabs: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15. E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. G. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface. 2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water to expose slip-resistive aggregate. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-17 A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of methods listed for “Unformed Surfaces”. C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-18 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer’s approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-19 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer’s approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval. 3.16 CONCRETE WALKS AND PLATFORMS A. Slope in the transverse direction 1/8” per foot. B. Cut reinforcement at all control or expansion joints. C. Jointing: 1. Transverse contraction joints (control joints) shall be installed at regular intervals no greater than five feet to a depth of not less than one inch with a maximum width of one- quarter (1/4) inch. 2. Expansion joint material shall be placed in the concrete walks and curb at the same section where indicated on the Drawings. Expansion joint material, extending through the entire thickness of the slab and secured against movement during concrete placement, shall be placed between the concrete and all fixed objects abutting or wholly within the sidewalk area. Included are walks meeting the building or prior placed walks not of the same straight run, and at all crosswalks. 3. Wherever concrete delivery is interrupted for thirty (30) minutes or more or at the end of a day’s run, a construction joint shall be placed, but at no distance lass than regular scoring. The joint, at right angles to the sidewalk surface and sides, shall be made with a keyed header-board properly placed and secured against displacement of additional run of concrete. Keyed joints shall be oiled before placement of additional run of concrete. D. Walks and platforms shall be constructed to drain all water and not allow water to puddle on them. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-20 E. Reinforce all sidewalks with one layer of 6x6-W1.4xW1.4 welded wire fabric unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. F. Walks and platforms shall be given a broom finish. Tool joints and edges. 3.17 EXTERIOR CONCRETE STEPS A. To be constructed and reinforced as shown on the Drawings. The risers shall be brought to the required elevations and steps finished with a brush finish running parallel to the length of the steps and all exposed edges rounded to one-half (1/2) inch radius. B. Brush finish as final finish operation. C. Forms for steps shall be removed not less than twelve (12) nor more than twenty-four (24) hours after the concrete is placed, unless prevailing weather conditions require a longer period. In removing forms, special care shall be exercised not to crack or injure exposed surfaces, corners and projections. Should damage occur, the Contractor shall remove and replace, at his own expense, as much of the concrete as the Engineer may direct. D. If the final curing has been applied to treads before the forms are removed, curing shall be placed on risers, ends and all exposed concrete as soon as possible after these parts are finished. All concrete shall be protected by an approved treatment during the curing periods. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each class of concrete, plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one standard cylinder for each composite sample. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-21 C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION 033000 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 1 SECTION 034100 - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes precast structural concrete. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design precast structural concrete, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Select material and minimum thicknesses to provide indicated fire rating. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. C. Shop Drawings: Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings, support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Welding certificates. G. Material certificates. H. Material test reports. I. Source quality-control reports. J. Field quality-control reports. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant as follows: a. Group C. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations in PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast structural concrete units indicated. C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality- control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products." D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." E. Fire-Resistance Calculations: Where indicated, provide precast structural concrete units whose fire resistance meets the prescriptive requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies," and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material in same position as during storage. B. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage. C. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips. D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 116. 2.2 PRESTRESSING TENDONS A. Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270, uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand. 1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying with ACI 423.6 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.6. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 4 E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture. 2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 116. C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M. D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M. E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30. F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M. G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65. I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M. J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844. K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F 436. 1. Do not zinc coat ASTM A 490 bolts. L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC- Paint 20. M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized-steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop apply lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79 [SSPC-Paint 25] according to SSPC-PA 1. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 5 2.5 BEARING PADS A. Provide bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator for application. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. 1. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. 2. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and granulated blast-furnace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal- weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 116. F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 6 G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. 1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding." B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings. D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval. E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. F. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. G. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116. H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116. K. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement. L. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot-weather concrete placement. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 7 M. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure. N. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product. O. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval. 2.9 CASTING INSULATED WALL PANELS A. Cast and screed wythe supported by mold. B. Place insulation boards abutting edges and ends of adjacent boards. Insert wythe connectors through insulation, and consolidate concrete around connectors according to connector manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cast and screed top wythe to meet required finish. 2.10 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate precast structural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product dimension tolerances. 2.11 COMMERCIAL FINISHES A. Commercial Grade: Remove fins and large protrusions and fill large holes. Rub or grind ragged edges. Faces must have true, well-defined surfaces. Air holes, water marks, and color variations are permitted. Limit form joint offsets to 3/16 inch. B. Standard Grade: Normal plant-run finish produced in molds that impart a smooth finish to concrete. Surface holes smaller than 1/2 inch caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are permitted. Fill air holes greater than 1/4 inch in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in. Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted. Limit joint offsets to 1/8 inch. C. Grade B Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch in diameter with sand-cement paste matching color of adjacent surfaces. Fill air holes greater than 1/8 inch in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in.. Grind smooth form offsets or fins larger than 1/8 inch. Repair surface blemishes due to holes or dents in molds. Discoloration at form joints is permitted. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 8 D. Grade A Finish: Fill surface blemishes with the exception of air holes 1/16 inch in width or smaller, and form marks where the surface deviation is less than 1/16 inch. Float apply a neat cement-paste coating to exposed surfaces. Rub dried paste coat with burlap to remove loose particles. Discoloration at form joints is permitted. Grind smooth all form joints. E. Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating screeds to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections. Normal color variations, minor indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. Major imperfections, honeycombing, or defects are not permitted. F. Smooth, steel trowel finish unformed surfaces. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level with straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish. G. Apply roughened surface finish according to ACI 318 to precast concrete units that will receive concrete topping after installation. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116 requirements. B. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved samples, sample panels, and mockups. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials. B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary structural framing, supports, and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connection. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. 2. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed. 3. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align voids between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs. C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 9 D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of the Architect. E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast, prestressed concrete units. F. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment. H. Grouting: Grout connections and joints and open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135. B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be visually inspected and nondestructive tested according to ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect. 1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and appearance of units has not been impaired. B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 07654 07/11/08 PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 034100 - 10 original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet. C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer. E. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's written recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials. END OF SECTION 034100 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 1 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 04 20 00: UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all masonry work in accordance with the Contract Documents to include: 1. Concrete masonry units 2. Mortar and grout 3. Reinforcing steel 4. Masonry joint reinforcement 5. Ties and anchors 6. Embedded flashing 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories 8. Installation of hollow metal frames 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Specified elsewhere: 1. Division 1: Section 01 45 24 - Testing Laboratory Services 2. Division 3: Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Division 4: Section 04 43 00 – Limestone Section 04 43 12 - Limestone Rubble Veneer 4. Division 5: Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 2 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 5. Division 7: Section 07 21 00 – Building Insulation Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants 6. Division 8: Section 08 11 13 – Steel Doors and Frames Section 08 31 00 – Access Doors 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530.1-95 “Specifications for Masonry Structures” B. Indiana Building Code, 2003 Edition C. The “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” (current edition), published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. is hereby incorporated by reference. D. National Concrete Masonry Association “Manual of Facts on Concrete Masonry”, current edition. E. Brick Institute of America Technical Notes F. ASTM E119, fire performance G. Other reference standards as listed in Part 2. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.” Show elevations of reinforced walls. C. Samples for Initial Selection for the following: 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 3 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Unit masonry samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Each type of masonry unit required: a) Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. 2. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Fire-resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Mockups: Before installing unit masonry, build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed work: 1. Locate mockups in the location directed by Architect/Engineer. 2. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches (1,200 mm) long by 48 inches (1,200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in each mockup. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 4 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 a) Typical exterior wall with through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600 mm) length in corner of mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, complete with metal studs, sheathing, veneer ties, flashing, and weep holes. 3. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 5. Notify Architect/Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 6. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. 8. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. 9. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to present corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 5 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projects from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven (7) days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 degrees F (38 degrees C), or 90 degrees\ F (32 degrees C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches (1,200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 6 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as square. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, ASTM C55, and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1,900 psi (13.1MPa). 2. Weight Classification: Standard weight for all walls below grade; lightweight for all walls above grade and all interior partitions, unless otherwise noted. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a) 6 inches (152 mm) nominal; 5-5/8 inches (143 mm) actual b) 8 inches (203 mm) nominal; 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) actual c) 10 inches (254 mm) nominal; 9-5/8 inches (244 mm) actual d) 12 inches (304 mm) nominal, 11-5/8 inches (294 mm) actual 4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer’s standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. a) Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect’s sample. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 7 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144; except for joints less than ¼ inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. E. Water: Potable. F. Use colored mortar for all face brick, color as selected from the mortar manufacturer’s entire range of colors. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M; ASTM A616/A616M, Including Supplement 1; or ASTM A617/A617M, Grade 60 (Grade 400). 2.04 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: ASTM A951 and as follows: 1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148 inch (8.8-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units where indicated. B. For single-wythe masonry, provide ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. For composite walls, provide ladder type reinforcement with double eye ties welded at each cross wire at 16 inches o.c. (407 mm). C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a) Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 8 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Seismic Masonry- Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint. a) Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of sire tie specially formed to fit anchor section. Size wire tie to extend at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16 mm) cover on outside face. b) Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap-in grooves for inserting continuous wire. Size wire tie to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. c) Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097-inch (2.5-mm) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. d) Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.188-inch (4.8 mm) diameter, hot- dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire. e) Manufacturer/Product: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213S 2) Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond clip 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H-B 200 S.I.S E. Wire Mesh Wall Ties: 2 x 2 (1/2 inch grid) x 16 gauge hit-dip galvanized wire; 4 inches wide x 16 inches long. 2.05 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hot-dip Galvanized Carbon-steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 9 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 2.06 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STEEL FRAME A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section: Crimped ¼ inch (6.4 mm) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire anchor section for welding to steel. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.1875 inch (4.8 mm) diameter. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where Indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations. 1. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated. B. Post-installed Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Expansion anchors. 2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 3. For Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed. 4. For Post-installed Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed. 2.08 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed, complying with SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 10 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and ½ inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 3. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross- laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). a) Products: 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-0-Barrier- 44. 3) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. – Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 4) (IL) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. 5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, ¼ to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter, in length required to product 2-inch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity between wythes. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene nylon or polyester strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. Thickness shall match masonry cavity. 1. Products: a) Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc. b) CavClear masonry Mat; CavClear. c) Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 11 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 d) Mortar Stop; Polytite Manufacturing Corp. E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 1. Provide units wither two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 2. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: a) D/A 811; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b) (IL) No. 376 Rebar Positioner; Heckman Building Products, Inc. c) #RB Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d) O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America 2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of ½ cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasoldium polyphosphate and ½ cup (0.14-L) dry measure commercial detergent dissolved in 1 gallon (4L) of water. 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 2. For all masonry, use type S mortar, except use Type N for all masonry exposed to weather. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 12 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Grout for unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine only) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Providing grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections. 3.02 INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this section and in other sections of the specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 13 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than ¼ inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor ½ inch (12 mm) maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than ¼ inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor ½ inch (12 mm) maximum. D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than ¼ inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor ½ inch (12 mm) maximum. E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to ½ inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thickness and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100 mm) horizontal face 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 14 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100 mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one- half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of the specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in-items. F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 15 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 columns, and piasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the brick. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 CAVITIES A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. B. Where indicated, parge cavity face of back-up using Type S or Type N mortar applied in a single coat approximately 3/8 inch thick. Trowel face of parge coat smooth. 1. Form a walk at top of parging and a cove at bottom. 3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and to concrete backup with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners. 2. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 16 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 and 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. (0.33 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm) around perimeter. 3.08 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, ½ inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings. a) Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.09 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (24 mm) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 17 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build- in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from lay or shale as follows: 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.” Keep joint free and clear of mortar. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 1. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face of sheathing at least 16 inches (400 mm), and behind air- 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 18 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 infiltration barrier or building paper. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 3. Extend flashing ¼ inch beyond face of wall. Turn down to form drip edge. C. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be a inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches (9600 mm) o.c. D. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. 3.13 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 19 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing indicated below. 1. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor’s expense. B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during construction for each 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. C. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780. D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140. 3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In-progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 20 OF 20 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 04 43 10 - LIMESTONE PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 04 43 10: LIMESTONE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all limestone and stone masonry work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Sealant work related to cut stone installations is included under this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 41 00: Precast Structural Concrete B. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry C. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. “Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures” (ACI 530) and “Specifications for Masonry Structures” (ACI 530). B. Indiana Building Code, Latest Edition. C. "Recommended Standards and Practices" as published by The Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc., 21st edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 1" x 12" x 12" samples of cut stone for approval by the Architect. Submit an adequate number of samples to show extreme variations in specified texture, color and finish. Install additional samples of the cut stone in the masonry sample panels as specified in Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry. B. Submit cutting and setting drawings showing sizes, sections, and dimensions of all cut stone, the arrangement of joints, end bonding, flashing anchoring and other necessary details. 1. NOTE: Coordinate required inserts in Precast Concrete for cut limestone with Precast Concrete supplier. 2. Follow jointing patterns and expansion joints as shown on the Contract Drawings whenever possible. 3. If Contract Drawings do not show intent of jointing or expansion, establish jointing and expansion in accordance with industry standards and practices as recommended 04 43 10 - LIMESTONE PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 by the Limestone Institute of America, Indiana Building Code and ANSI. 4. Each cut stone piece shall be identified on the shop drawings by number and corresponding number shall be placed on each piece of fabricated stone. 5. Shop drawings must be reviewed and returned prior to the fabrication of any cut stone work. 6. Submit literature on cut stone cleaning products. 1.05 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stone shall be carefully packed for transportation, with exercise of all customary and reasonable precautions against damage in transit. B. Unload stone at the site with necessary care to avoid damage and soiling. C. Store stone off ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust or materials likely to cause staining or other defects. D. Cover as necessary to protect from the elements. E. Deliver and store manufactured mortar products in original unopened containers. F. Store cementitious materials in weathertight enclosures and protect against contamination. G. Stockpile and handle aggregates to prevent contamination from foreign material. H. Protect anchors, ties and reinforcement from the elements. I. Handle stone units on pallets or flat bed barrows. J. Do not permit free discharge of stone units from conveyors or transporting in mortar trays. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Limestone: Indiana Oolitic Limestone, Select grade, buff color, smooth machined finish, sizes and profiles as shown on the Drawings. ASTM C568. Acceptable suppliers include the Bybee Stone Company, Indiana Limestone Company, Elliott Stone, Inc. Becker and Becker Stone Company, Midland Cut Stone Company, or approved equal. B. Cut Stone Date Stone: 16” wide x 12” high x + 3” thick limestone. Letters and Cross to be style and size with incision similar to existing date stone on Phase 2. Locate per Architect directions. 04 43 10 - LIMESTONE PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Anchors, dowels, wire reinforcing and other devices required for setting cut stone shall be stainless steel, of types and sizes detailed and/or recommended by the stone fabricator and/or installer. All stainless steel shall be ASTM A666 Type 304 or 316. D. Stone anchors: As manufactured by Heckman Building Products, Inc., Chicago, Illinois 60624, AA Wire Products, Dur-O-Wal, Wire Bond, National Wire or approved equal. 1. Stone pin anchor - Heckman No. 155, 1/2" diameter, 6" long, stainless steel. 2. Other types as required and appropriate. E. Setting Mortar: Nonstaining type N, composed of one (1) part nonstaining Type I Portland Cement (ASTM C150), one (1) part Type S lime putty (ASTM C207) and six (6) parts sand (ASTM C144-89). All quantities shall be accurately measured by volume. Masonry cement is not allowed. F. Pointing Mortar: One (1) part nonstaining Type I white Portland Cement (ASTM C150), six (6) parts clean white sand and one (1) part hydrated lime to make as stiff a mixture as can be worked. G. Water: Potable, clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials. H. Mortar additive for stonework shall be "Omicron Mortar Proofing" as manufactured by Master Builders, or an approved equal. I. Weeps shall be formed of 1/4" x 24" long canvas rope. J. Sealant: Multi-Component polyurethane sealant, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. Use with primer. K. Joint Backing: Closed cell polyethylene backer rod, sized to provide 30 % compression in the joint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not install stonework when the temperature is below 32 degrees F. and rising or below 40 degrees F. and falling unless cold weather procedures and enclosures are utilized. B. Do not build on frozen work. Protect work from freezing for forty-eight (48) hours. C. Cover top of completed work at end of each workday. D. Wherever necessary protect portions of completed stonework to prevent damage due to other construction operations. Protection shall consist of non-staining wood and plastic sheeting or similar protection. 04 43 10 - LIMESTONE PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mortar shall be thoroughly machine mixed for at least five (5) minutes after all materials in the mixer. All mortar shall contain the specified mortar additive, integrally mixed in exact accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Water shall be used in the quantity necessary to give proper workability. B. Mortar shall be discarded if not used within 2-1/2 hours when the air temperature is 80 degrees F. or higher, or within 3-1/2 hours when temperature is below 80 degrees F. Within these time intervals, mortar, except pointing mortar that has stiffened because of moisture evaporation, may be retempered. Mortar that has stiffened because of setting (hydration) shall be discarded. Pointing mortar shall not be retempered. C. All stone shall be set accurately in strict accordance with the Contract and shop drawings. All cutting, setting, cleaning and other work required for the completion of the stone work shall be executed only by skilled workmen specially trained and experienced in their particular branch of the work. Use masonry saws to cut units. When necessary, before setting in the wall, all stone shall be thoroughly cleaned on all exposed surfaces by washing with brush and soap powder, followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Just prior to setting, all stones not thoroughly wet shall be sponged or drenched with clean water. D. All cut stone shall be set in accordance with approved shop drawings. All bed and vertical joints shall be 3/8" unless otherwise noted, tooled-concave. E. The Contractor shall place all anchors, dowels, and cramps required for setting, securing and joining stone as work progresses or prior to setting the stone where conditions necessitate advance installation. F. All stone shall be set accurately, true to line and level, with flush joints, filling all anchor holes, etc. Cut stone shall be set on thoroughly soaked wooden wedges, which shall not be removed until the building is cleaned and pointed. In lieu of wedges, lead pellets may be used and remain in place. All stone shall be flush at all contacts with adjacent stone, unless detailed otherwise. G. Any chipped or damaged cut stone shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Owner. Any cracked stone shall be replaced at no additional cost to the owner. H. Except as otherwise specially noted, every stone shall be set in full beds on nonstaining mortar with all joints full, or as detailed on the Drawings. Completely fill all anchor, dowel, and similar holes. Provide weep holes at each stone joint where through wall flashing occurs. 1. Cut stone caps a) Rake all horizontal joints 1" deep for installation of backer rod and sealant. b) All vertical joints shall be free of mortar. 04 43 10 - LIMESTONE PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 c) The exterior profile of all vertical and horizontal joints shall be packed with backer rod and treated with sealant. I. Do not set heavy stones or projecting courses until mortar in courses below has hardened. J. Unless otherwise noted, rake out all joints 3/4" from the face for pointing. Sponge the face of stone clean along all joints. Avoid splashing mortar on exposed faces of stone. Droppings shall be removed immediately by use of sponge and clear water. Thoroughly wet the joint and point flush with specified pointing mortar forced into the joint and rubbed smooth to the section detailed. Special care shall be exercised in sealing and pointing up all top or wash joints. K. Repair and point up defective work and clean all stone work prior to acceptance by the Owner. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Stone work shall be cleaned using a mild alkaline abrasive cleaner containing no caustic or harsh fillers, applied using fiber brushes and clear water. The use of sandblasting, wire brushes or acids will not be permitted for cleaning. B. Protect completed stone work as required to prevent damage and staining from subsequent construction operations. 3.06 DISPOSAL A. All debris and waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by this Contractor. END OF SECTION 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 1 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 04 43 12: LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all limestone rubble veneer work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Sealant work related to limestone rubble veneer installation is included under this section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, including the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 03 41 00: Precast Structural Concrete D. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry E. Section 04 43 10: Limestone F. Section 04 40 00: Cold Formed Metal Framing G. Section 07 62 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal H. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants I.. Section 09 24 13: Cement Lathing & Plastering (Stucco) 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. "Recommended Standards and Practices" as published by The Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc., 21st Edition. B. ANSI Standard A41.1-53, "American Standard Building Code Requirements for Masonry". C. Indiana Building Code, 2003 Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 2 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for all premanufactured items, including masonry anchors. B. Sample Panels: Submit 4' x 4' samples panels of rough stone and mortar, laid up at the jobsite, for approval by the Architect. Submit an adequate number of samples to show extreme variations in specified shape, color and pattern. As many as three sample panels may be required without addition to the contract. C. Submit test results or manufacturer's certification that proposed mortar mix meets the requirements of this specification. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store stone on protective ground cover to prevent contamination by mud, dust or materials likely to cause staining or other defects. B. Deliver and store manufactured mortar products in original unopened containers. C. Store cementitious materials in weathertight enclosures and protect against contamination and warehouse set. D. Stock pile and handle aggregates to prevent contamination from foreign materials. E. Protect anchors, tees and reinforcement from the elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rough Stone: Random white to grey with a 10% blend of rustic rubble stone to match colors, pattern, texture, size and color of existing stone on Phase 1 and 2 of the existing buildings. C. Stone Anchors: 1. Approved manufacturers: a) Hohmann & Barnard Inc. b) Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, Illinois c) Equal approved under the provisions of Section 01630 2. Metal accessories for use in exterior wall construction shall be hot-dipped 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 3 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM 153, Class B-2. 3. Stone Anchors: a) Hot dipped adjustable anchor and wire tie at metal studs: Hohmann & Barnard Inc. #345BT flexible tie.installed over Textroseal with two self tapping stainless steel screws, hot dipped galvanized steel or approved equal. Byna tie go be 3/16” diameter wire b) Hot dipped adjustable dovetail anchors at dovetail slots in Precast Concrete panels. D. Dowels, pins, straps and other accessories for the setting of cut stone shall be stainless steel (ASTM A666, Type 304), of types and sizes as shown on the Drawings, or as recommended by the stone installer. E. Setting Mortar: Type N mortar (proportions by volume). Portland Cement - 1 Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty - over 1/2 to 1-1/4 Aggregate - Not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of the cements and lime used. Masonry cement is not to be used. F. Pointing Mortar: One (1) part non-staining Type I Portland Cement (ASTM C150), two (2) parts clean white sand and sufficient lime or lime putty to make as stiff a mixture as can be worked. G. Mortar additive for stonework shall be "Omicron Mortar Proofing" as manufactured by Master Builders, "Dry Block" by W.R. Grace, or an approved equal. H. Weeps shall be formed of 1/4" diameter x 16” long cotton rope. Provide 2” exposure on exterior. I. Sealant: Multi-component epoxidize polyurethane sealant, FS TT-S227E Type II, Class A, Tremco Dymeric or approved equal. J. Joint Backing: Closed cell polyethylene backer rod, sized to provide 30% compression in the joint. K. Soft joint at shelf angles: 2-3/4" wide closed cell neoprene joint material, 50% compressible, with adhesive on one side, complying with ASTM D-1056, Class RE41. Thickness as noted on the Drawings: 1. Approved products: 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 4 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 a) Rapid Soft Joint D1A 2010 by Dur-O-Wall, Inc. b) AA3405 Joint-tite by AA Wire Products c) Number 3300 by Wire Bond d) Equal approved under the provisions of Section 01630 L. Flashing: Composite Copper Flexible Flashing. 1. 7 oz. copper bonded on both sides with heavy asphalt saturated fiberglass fabric. 2. Manufacturers: a) York Copper Fabric. b) AFCO Copper Fabric. c) Advanced Building Products Copper Fabric. d) Sandell Manufacturing Co. 3. Adhesive: Manufacturers recommended. M. Drip Edge: Stainless Steel. 1. Fabricate from 0.015"stainless steel sheet, type 304. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and ½” out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 2. Manufacturers: a) Hohmann and Bernard b) Sandell Manufacturing Co. N. Mortar Barrier at Base of Cavity: Nylon or HDPE woven mesh 1/2" thick x 10″ high with staggered top, thickness to fill cavity. Mortar-Net or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not erect stonework when the temperature is below 32°F. and rising or below 40°F. and falling. B. Do not build on frozen work. C. Protect work from freezing for 48 hours. Cover top of completed work to keep out rain and snow. 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 5 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Wherever necessary or whenever directed by the General Contractor, protect portions of completed stonework to prevent damage due to other construction operations. Protection shall consist of nonstaining wood and plastic sheeting or an approved equal system. All projecting work shall be protected in a similar manner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mortar shall be thoroughly mixed for at least five minutes after all material is in the mixer. All mortar shall contain the specified mortar additive, integrally mixed in exact accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Water shall be used in the quantity necessary to give proper workability. B. Mortar shall be discarded if not used within 2-1/2 hours when the air temperature is 80°F. or higher, or within 3-1/2 hours when temperature is below 80°F. Within these time intervals, mortar (except pointing mortar) that has stiffened because of moisture evaporation may be retempered. Mortar that has stiffened because of setting (hydration) shall be discarded. Pointing mortar shall not be retempered. C. All stone shall be set accurately in strict accordance with the Contract Drawings. All cutting, setting, cleaning and other work required for the completion of the stone work shall be executed only by skilled workmen specially trained and experienced in their particular branch of the work. Use masonry saws to cut units where required. When necessary, before setting in the wall, all stone shall be thoroughly cleaned on all exposed surfaces by washing with brush and soap powder, followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Just prior to setting, all stones not thoroughly wet shall be sponged or drenched with clean water. D. Joint Work: Joints between stones shall be no less than 1/4" nor greater than 5/8". Joints shall be tooled back behind face of stone. E. Stone Pattern: Lay stone in an uncoursed pattern with natural bedding planes of stones laid roughly horizontal, squared edges of stones roughly horizontal and vertical, to match existing. Select stones for a uniform distribution of variations in size and color. F. The Contractor shall place all anchors, dowels, and cramps required for setting, securing and joining stone as work progresses or prior to setting the stone where conditions necessitate advance installation. G. All stone shall be set accurately, true to line and level, with flush joints, filling all anchor holes, etc. H. Except as otherwise specially noted, every stone shall be set in full beds on 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 6 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 nonstaining mortar with all joints full, or as detailed on the Drawings. Completely fill all anchor, dowel, and similar holes. I. Do not set heavy stones or projecting courses until mortar in courses below has hardened. J. Projecting stones shall be securely propped or anchored until the wall above is set. K. Set steel lintels where shown and/or required. L. Provide expansion and control joints where indicated on the Drawings. M. Repair and point up all defective work and clean all stone work prior to acceptance by the Owner. N. Cavity Walls: 1. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other debris. 2. Provide weepholes in exterior wythe of wall immediately above all ledges and flashings, spaced 16″ o.c., unless otherwise noted. Do not install below grade. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. 3. Install mortar net at bottom of all cavities. 3.03 MASONRY FLASHING A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install all work with laps, joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. C. Electrolytic Prevention: Contact between dissimilar flashing materials shall receive a protective coating for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion. D. Flashing shall be one piece at lintels, sills and shelf-angles. 1. Lintel flashing shall extend the full length of lintel. 2. Sill flashing shall generally extend the full width of the sill and not less than 4" beyond ends of sill. 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 7 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 3. End joints shall be lapped at least 4" and sealed watertight with an approved non-hardening plastic sealant. 4. All flashings shall be turned up at the ends to form a dam. E. Through-wall base and parapet flashing shall be installed according to the Contract Drawings. 1. Base flashing shall be continuous around the building. 2. Parapet flashing shall be continuous below masonry coping and extend into intersecting vertical walls. 3. Inside and outside corners shall be shop fabricated. 4. Flashing end joints shall lap a minimum of 4” and be sealed with an elastomeric sealant. F. All flashing fabrications and installations shall comply with the Contract Drawings and the recommendations of the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." (Fifth Edition, 1993) G. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 1. Install stainless steel drip edge in sealant. 2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing over s.s drip edge 1” from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face of sheathing at least 12 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier. Flashing shall be per the Drawings and per SMACNA figure 4-1A. 3.04 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of other trades affecting it. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. The use of sandblasting, wire brushes or acids will not be permitted for cleaning. 04 43 12 – LIMESTONE RUBBLE VENEER PAGE 8 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Protect completed stone work as required to prevent damage and staining from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 1 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes structural steel and grout. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9 AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. C. Welding certificates. D. Mill test reports. E. Source quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." C. Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992. B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 2 C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. B. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight and Hooked. 2. Finish: Plain. C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36. 1. Finish: Plain. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. B. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 3 B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning” at exposed steel surfaces. C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Comply with testing and inspection requirements of Part 3, Article "Field Quality Control." B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 4 B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." C. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200 - 5 b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 05120 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STEEL JOISTS 052100 - 1 SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 4. Joist accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. C. Welding certificates. D. Manufacturer certificates. E. Mill Certificates: For bolts. F. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. G. Research/Evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, SJI's "Specifications") that are applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STEEL JOISTS 052100 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members. B. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members. 2.3 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. C. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. D. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STEEL JOISTS 052100 - 3 2.4 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories. Apply 1 coat of shop primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts. E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connections' "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 052100 St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STEEL DECK 053100 - 1 SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof Deck 2. Noncomposite form deck. 3. Composite form deck 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. C. Product certificates. D. Welding certificates. E. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. C. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STEEL DECK 053100 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc. 2. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 3. Epic Metals Corp. 4. Marilyn Steel Products, Inc. 5. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Div. 6. Roof Deck, Inc. 7. United Steel Deck, Inc. 8. Verco Manufacturing Co. 9. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc coating. Minimum Fy = 60 ksi. 2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib, Type 3DR, deep rib. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, the minimum section properties indicated, and the following: 1. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 2. Profile Depth: 2 inches. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch. 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 2.4 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, the minimum section properties indicated, and the following: St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STEEL DECK 053100 - 3 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade C D E minimum, top and bottom surface shop primed with gray or white baked-on, lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer. Minimum Fy = 60 ksi. 2. Profile Depth: 1 inch. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories: Steel deck manufacturer's standard accessory materials, including mechanical fasteners, closure strips, pour stops, and closures for deck. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. C. Repair Paint: Lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 1. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. G. Roof Deck Accessories: Install sump pans and sump plates, ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. H. Repairs and Protection: St. Christopher’s Episcopal Church © Lawson Elser, Inc. / Proj. No. 0765 07/11/08 STEEL DECK 053100 - 4 1. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 053100 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 1 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary and incidental to the completion of all cold-formed metal framing work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing. 2. Ceiling joist framing. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming. B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As Indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. b. Exterior Wall Framing for Masonry Veneer: Horizontal deflection of 1/720 of the wall height. c. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 2 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances and loads at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted on the Documents. B. Design exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings prepared by cold-formed metal framing manufacturer. Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work. 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Power-actuated anchors. 3. Mechanical fasteners. 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 3 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 4. Vertical deflection clips. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data. C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. E. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing: 1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections." 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 4 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 framing by one of the following: 1. Clark Western Building Systems 2. Dietrich Metal Framing 3. MarinoWare 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade 33 (Fy = 33ksi.) for 18 gauge and lighter units, Grade 50 (Fy = 50ksi.) for 16 gauge and heavier units. 2. Grade: 33 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (18 ga.) and less; 50 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (16 ga.) and greater. 3. Coating: G60. 4. Coating: G90 for masonry veneer. 2.03 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 ga.), or as indicated on Documents. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches. C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows: 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 5 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch (16 ga.). 2. Flange Width: 3" (76.2 mm). D. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass and head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure. 2.04 CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 ga.). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 2.05 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5. Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates. 7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 8. Joist hangers and end closures. 9. Hole reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates. 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 6 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 2.06 ANCHORS, CLIPS AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. D. Sill Sealer: mineral fiber or closed cell polyethylene foam. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 7 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by screw fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. G. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 8 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.04 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. Install sill sealer under all exterior tracks. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing and infill studs and anchor to primary building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in curtain-wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 54 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PAGE 9 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Screwed connections will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 05 50 00: METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all metal fabrications work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Unless specifically noted otherwise, it is intended that all miscellaneous steel framing, loose lintels, angle framing, clip angles, shelf angles, brackets, supports and similar metal items be furnished under this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry C. Section 05 51 13: Metal Pan Stairs D. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel E. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Finishing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete shop drawings for all fabricated items, showing dimensions, materials, thickness, finish, construction details, reinforcement, anchorage and installation details. B. Submit catalog information, specifications, technical data and illustrations for all manufactured items. 1.04 GENERAL A. Verify all measurements and take all necessary field measurements before fabrication. B. Welding to or on structural steel shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Code for Welding in Building Construction. 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and shall harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of the work. Fastenings shall be concealed where practical. D. Include all materials, fittings, accessories and incidentals necessary to complete each item. E. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat of bituminous paint complying with Federal Specification TT-V-51: Asphalt varnish. F. ALL EXTERIOR FERROUS ITEMS, AND ALL FERROUS ITEMS WHICH ARE TO BE CAST IN CONCRETE, OR SET IN MORTAR IN EXTERIOR MASONRY WALLS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION AND GIVEN A CHROMATIC TREATMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AMERICAN HOT DIP GALVANIZERS ASSOCIATION RECOMMENDATIONS, ASTM A123-89A. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rolled steel structural sections: ASTM A36. B. Other steel sections and plate: Commercial quality low carbon steel, ASTM A588. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A501. D. Threaded fasteners: ASTM A307, galvanized. E. Primer: Zinc Dust Primer No. 299 by Porter Paint, or approved equal. Do not substitute without Architect's written approval. F. Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, minimum 70 grade. G. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade A, G90, 0.9 ounces of zinc per square foot. H. Aluminum Alloy: 6061-T6. I. Stainless Steel Alloy: ASTM A167, Type 304. 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Welding shall conform to AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds and rough edges smooth. B. After work is fabricated, peen or upset bolt threads to prevent loosening. C. Improperly fabricated items shall not be field corrected by torching. D. Hot-dip galvanized finish shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A123, two (2) ounces per square foot. E. Shop-applied Priming: 1. Prepare ferrous items for priming as follows: a) Remove obvious deposits of grease and oil. b) Remove loose mill scale, loose black oxide, all rust, all welding flux and spatter, and other contaminants by grinding and wire brushing. Do not roughen or burnish metal. c) Clean entire surface by flooding with clean mineral spirits and wiping dry with clean cloths. 2. Prime ferrous surfaces immediately after cleaning. 3. Apply primer in accordance with the manufacturer's label instructions, at 2.0 mils DFT. a) Avoid runs, sags and holidays b) Brush primer into cracks and joints. c) Allow adequate drying time before handling or shipping primed items. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items firmly attached to supporting construction in accordance with approved shop drawings and the Contract Drawings. Use non-corrosive fasteners of a type appropriate for the substrate and of size and quantity as required to develop the full structural potential of the assembly. 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 B. If primer becomes damaged, prep and prime damaged spots as specified under paragraph 3.01(E) above. C. Repair all damaged galvanized surfaces by wire brushing, cleaning and spot priming with the specified primer at 2.0 mils DFT. 3.03 SCHEDULE The following schedule is included for the purpose of providing additional detailed requirements and for informational purposes. It is not to be considered a complete listing of all miscellaneous metal items required for the Project. Except for items, which are specifically included under other sections of the Specifications, all miscellaneous metal required for completion of the Project, is included under this Section. A. Miscellaneous steel framing, lintels, brackets, supports: Fabricate structural shapes as shown on the Contract Drawings and as required by job conditions. Furnish all anchors and fastenings of appropriate size and type to provide a secure, rigid installation. 1. Lintels shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings or, if not sized, as per the schedule in the Structural Drawings. 2. All lintels in exterior walls shall be hot-dipped galvanized and primed. B. Metal Ladders: Steel fixed-rail type, ASTM A36, conforming to ANSI A14.3. 1. Exterior ladders shall be galvanized. and primed. 2. Rails shall be 3/8" x 2-1/2" steel bars. No splices are allowed in rails less than 16'- 0" long. 3. Rungs shall be 3/4" diameter smooth steel rods spaced 12" o.c., fitted into punched holes in rails, welded and ground smooth. 4. Angle brackets shall be ASTM A36, configuration indicated on Drawings. C. Pipe railings: Standard weight steel pipe, ASTM A53-89, and other steel components, size and configuration as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise noted, use flush type fittings, welded and ground smooth. For anchors, details, sizes not shown, follow recommendations of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 2. In new concrete, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings, rail posts shall be installed in sockets in the concrete, formed with removable polystyrene foam inserts. Pocket diameter shall be approximately 1/2" greater than pipe O.D. Pocket depth shall be 8". 3. Posts shall be anchored in concrete with a quick-setting hydraulic cement (Por- Rok or approved equal). 4. Ends of rails shall be secured to concrete or masonry walls by means of standard steel pipe flange and expansion anchors or toggle bolts, except where otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. 5. All exterior railings shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and primed. D. Metal Grating: ASTM A570 welded steel grating, hot-dip galvanized. 1. Provide sizes and components as shown on Contract Drawings. a) Grating is to have 1-1/2" x 3/16" main bearing bars at 1-3/16" o.c. Cross bars are to be at 4" o.c. b) Grating shall sustain a uniform load of 150 psf on a 6' span with deflection of less than 1/4". c) Provide operable panel with heavy-duty hinges and locking hardware. 2. Provide support angles, anchorage devices and other structural elements for support of the grating assembly in accordance with the loads specified above. 3. Acceptable products and manufacturers: a) Type WB, Size 8, by IKG Borden, IKG Industries, (201) 815-9500. b) Approved equal. E. Elevator thresholds, lintels, brackets, hoist beams, divider beams and guiderails: ASTM A36 steel, coordinate fabrication and installation of elevator steel accessories with Elevator Contractor (refer to Section 14 24 25 - Hydraulic Elevators). 1. Elevator pit sump pump cover: 1/4" thick plate steel 2. Fabricate of 1/4" thick steel checker plate with 1" diameter finger hole, to fit openings as shown on the Drawings. 3. Steel plate covers shall be sized to allow 1/4" clearance at all sides. 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 4. Openings to receive steel plate covers shall be formed to sizes as shown on the Drawings, without steel frame. F. Lintels: 1. Lintels shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings or, if not sized, as per the following schedule. Steel Angle Lintel Schedule (see note #5 for angles in exterior wall) Masonry Wall Thickness Opening 4" Wall 6" Wall 8" Wall 12" Wall 3'-0" 1 - 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 3" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 3 - 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 4'-0" 1 - 4" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 3" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 4" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 3 - 4" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 5'-0" 1 - 4" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 3-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 5" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 3 - 5" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 6'-0" 1 - 5" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 3-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 5" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 3 - 5" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" 8'-0" 2 - 3-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 1/4" 2 - 6" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" 3 - 6" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" 2. Install long leg vertical. See Architectural and Mechanical plans for locations. 3. Provide 6" minimum bearing at each end but not less than 1" per foot of span. Fill 2 courses of masonry below bearing with mortar. 4. Where minimum bearing cannot be provided, attach securely to adjacent structural members or provide separate supports. 5. Where lintels occur in exterior walls minimum thickness shall be 5/16" and angles shall be hot dipped galvanized. 6. Where wall thickness exceeds 12" provide 1 additional angle for each additional 4" of wall. G. Non-slip stair nosings: Cast iron safety nosings, not less than 1/4" thick, 3" wide and 3" shorter than the tread at each side. Nosing shall be preset, flush with top surface of tread, fastened with anchors extending into the concrete. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 05 51 13: METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all metal stairs work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel C. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications D. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Finishing 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare shop drawings under the direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of his work and licensed in the State of Indiana. B. Fabricator's Qualifications: A minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the fabrication of metal stairs similar to those specified. C. Welder's Certificates: Submit under provisions of Division 1, certifying welders employed on the work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricator shall provide complete structural engineering design and calculations for metal stairs, developed and signed by a structural engineer registered in the State of Indiana. B. Fabricate stair assembly to support live load of 100 lb/sq. ft. with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 1/240 of span. In addition, each stair tread and landing shall support a 300 lb. concentrated load at any point. C. Stair design shall comply, in all respects, with the Indiana Building Code, Current 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 edition. D. Handrails and supports shall be capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 lbs applied in any direction at any point on the railing. In addition, the railing shall withstand a 50 lb/LF lateral load. The uniform load and the concentrated load shall not be cumulative. E. Guardrails shall withstand a uniform lateral load of 50 lb/LF. F. Conform to profiles and layouts indicated on the Drawings. G. Stair design shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Building and Facilities (July 26, 1991) and the Indiana Handicapped Accessibility Code, 2003. In the event of conflict between these codes and other design requirements, the Architect shall be notified immediately. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in one group: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this section with the work of adjacent trades. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section. 1.07 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with all Federal (OSHA), State and local laws, which govern safety requirements for, steel erection. Comply with OSHA regulation 29 C.F.R. Section 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 1926.58. B. Indiana Building Code, Current Edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, directed by the Architect, or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, provide materials as required for the work and complying with the following minimum standards. 1. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. 2. Metal Pans: Form risers and subtreads from 12 gauge hot-rolled steel complying with ASTM A526. 3. Sheet Steel: Comply with following as appropriate: a) Galvanized: ASTM A526 and ASTM A525, coating G90. b) Landings: Cold-rolled 12 gauge steel complying with ASTM A366. 4. Steel Plate: a) Except for plates to be bent or cold-formed, comply with ASTM A36. b) For plates to be bent or cold-formed, comply with ASTM A283, Grade C. 5. Steel Bars and Bar-size Shapes: a) For hot-rolled carbon steel bars and bar-size shapes, comply with ASTM A575 in grade as selected by the fabricator; b) For other steel bars and bar-size shapes, comply with ASTM A663 or ASTM A36. 6. Steel Pipes: a) Comply with ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B; or comply with ASTM A120, Schedule 40. b) Galvanize where exposed to weather. 7. Machine Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Comply with ASTM A307, Grade A. 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 8. Arc-welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS A5.1, using E60XX or E70XX series as required for the intended use. 9. Handrail Brackets: Provide malleable iron or steel standard product units of the type indicated or otherwise required, complete with mounting plates and proper anchoring devices. Julius Blum & Co., #305. 10. Shop Primer: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer" or "Rustoleum Number 5769 Primer". 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop prefabricate in as large sections as practicable, and in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings. B. Railings and Handrails: Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect: 1. Fabricate from standard steel shapes to configurations and dimensions indicated or otherwise required for the use. 2. Make joints flush, with concealed and seamless fittings. 3. Accurately cut, miter, weld, and grind to achieve flush surfaces. 4. Make bends to preserve contour of the shapes. C. Priming: 1. Clean surfaces in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SP-3, "Power Tool Cleaning". 2. After surfaces are properly cleaned, apply the primer to a uniform 1.5 dry mils thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this section. B. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the original design and the approved shop drawings. Anchor all components firmly into position for a long life under hard use. C. Railings and Handrails: Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect: 1. At walls: a) Return handrail ends to within 1/8" of wall. b) Secure to wall with approved fasteners. c) Where on stud construction, provide backup plate within the studs and covering not less than three studs. 2. At steel stairs: a) Weld or bolt railings to stringers. b) At top of stairs, continue railings to walls. D. Upon completion of installation, touch up field welds and abraded surfaces, using primer specified for shop use. 3.03 CLEANUP A. The Contractor shall remove all excess materials, trash, debris and miscellaneous equipment. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS PAGE 6 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 END OF SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 06 10 00: ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all rough carpentry work as required for completion of the Project. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork B. Section 07 21 00: Building Insulation 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. DOC PS20, AMERICAN SOFTWOOD LUMBER STANDARD, U.S. Department of Commerce. B. PS 1-95, National Institute of Standards, U.S. Product Standards for Plywood. C. ASTM D245-81, Method for Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber. D. ASTM D2555-88, Method for Establishing Clear-wood Strength Values. E. American Plywood Association (APA). F. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). G. American Wood Preservers Bureau Standard (AWPB). H. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). I. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). J. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 1.04 SUBMITTALS 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 A. General: Submit each item in this article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials: 1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities of treated materials. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Lumber for rough woodwork shall be smooth surfaced, S4S, straight and air- dried or kiln-dried to a moisture content not exceeding 15%, except as otherwise noted. Sizes shown or specified are nominal; dressed sizes conforming to these standards are minimum. 2. Lumber shall conform to the WWPA Grading Rules or the Grading Rules of the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: a) General framing - Construction and Better or Stud Grade. 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 b) Plates, blocking, bracing and nailers - Standard Grade or better. c) Structural light framing - No. 2 minimum. 3. Lumber shall be one of the following species: a) Douglas Fir - Larch b) Douglas Fir South c) Hem Fir d) Western Hemlock e) Engelmann Spruce f) Southern Pine 4. Provide fire-retardant treated material where shown on the Drawings. 5. Provide preservative treated material for rough carpentry in connection with roof construction or in contact with masonry, metal or concrete, or where shown on the Drawings. B. Plywood: All plywood shall conform to, and bear the marks of the American Plywood Association and Product Standard PSI-74 of the Department of Commerce. 1. All plywood shall be APA "Rated Sheathing, Exposure I", 24/16 span rated, 1/2" thick unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fire-retardant treatment where shown on the Drawings. 3. Plywood Shall be one of the following species: a) Douglas Fir - Larch b) Douglas Fir South c) Hem Fir d) Engelmann Spruce 2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Wood to be treated for above ground or ground contact usage as required for location indicated. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 a) Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ) b) Cooper azole, (CA-B) 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Klin-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece, or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated or required, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated. 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacturer. 1. Fasteners and connectors for preservative-treated wood shall be hot-dipped zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Where wood is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and connectors with Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Bolts, Screws and Fasteners: Non-corrosive devices of type and size as shown on the Drawings, as required by code, or as best suited for intended use. C. Bolts for anchoring wood sills to masonry walls shall be hot dip galvanized, size as noted on the Drawings, spaced 2’-0” o.c. Washers and nuts shall be provided. D. Use only coated or stainless steel nails and fasteners with treated wood or plywood. 1. Protective coatings for connectors and fasteners: a) Hot-dip Galvanizing for Connectors: Provide hot-dip galvanizing in compliance with ASTM A-123. b) Stainless steel connectors or fasteners to be Type 304 or 316. Provide stainless steel fasteners at stainless steel connectors. c) Hot-dip Galvanizing for Fasteners: Provide hot-dip galvanizing in compliance with ASTM A-153. Provide hot-dip galvanize fasteners at hot-dip galvanized connectors. 2.05 BARRIER MEMBRANE A. Barrier Membrane: Provide Vycor Deck Protector by Grace Constrcution Products. Install Vycor Deck Protector on treated wood that will be in contact with galvanized metal connectors. B. Provide barrier membrane where preservative-treated wood contacts aluminum or steel (excluding rolled structural members, pipes or tubes). PART 3 - EXECUTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All blocking, nailers, framing, furring and other rough woodwork shall be properly framed, closely fitted, and accurately set to the required lines and levels and rigidly secured in place. B. Nailing shall conform to the requirements of the Indiana Building Code, 2003 Edition, Table 2304.9.1. C. Wood plates shall be set level and square and anchor bolted at 2'- 0" o.c. and not more than 12" from each end of each piece. Use minimum of two (2) anchors for each piece. D. Size and spacing of all framing members shall be as noted on the Drawings. Spacing of members not otherwise noted shall be 16" o.c. minimum. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 06 40 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 06 40 00: FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all finish carpentry and millwork in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry B. Section 08 14 16: Wood Doors (Flush) C. Section 08 14 33: Stile and Rail Wood Doors D. Section 08 71 00: Finish Hardware E. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Finishing F. Section 12 32 00: Manufactured Cabinets and Casework-Wood 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) shall apply and are hereby made a part of this Specification. 1. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy grades in this Specification shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards". 2. Any item not given a specific quality grade shall be Custom grade. B. In the event of a conflict between the AWI "Quality Standards" and specific requirements of this Section, the requirements of this Section shall govern. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The approved woodwork manufacturer shall have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work for a minimum of five (5) years. 06 40 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 B. The Architect and the Owner reserve the right to approve the woodwork manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all items of work under this section. B. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for specialty items not manufactured by the millwork manufacturer. C. Wood and Veneer Samples: 1. Submit representative samples of each type of wood and veneer. D. Finish samples: The Architect will provide the initial stain selection. After initial selection, submit the accepted finish on a 12" x 12" sample for Architect's final approval. E. Submit finished samples of each finish to be applied at factory. F. Submit samples of plastic laminate from the manufacturer's complete range of colors and patterns. 1.06 FIELD DIMENSIONS A. The millwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions. He shall show on his shop drawings all required measurements, which must be determined in the field. The Millwork Contractor and the millwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and coordinate these field dimensions. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The millwork manufacturer shall consult and coordinate with the Millwork Contractor to make certain that millwork is not delivered until the building and storage are sufficiently dry so that millwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM, CASINGS, RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Interior locations, for transparent finish: AWI Section 300. 1. AWI quality grade - Custom 06 40 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Solid wood – Red Oak plain sawn. 3. Veneer: Red Oak plain sawn. 4. Plywood –MDF core or medium density particleboard core. B. Interior locations, for opaque finish: AWI Section 300. 1. AWI quality grade - Custom 2. Solid wood - Paint grade poplar 3. Plywood - Medium density overlay plywood or paint grade birch, hardwood. C. Exterior locations, for opaque finish: AWI Section 300. 1. AWI quality grade: Custom. 2. Gutter and Rake trim (fiber cement) a) 1” thick James Hardee cementious Trim with factory applied sealer b) Fasteners: as recommended by Manufacturer c) Caulk: As recommended by Manufacturer d) Finish- field paint, under Section 09900 3. Continuous Eave vent: Provide continuous corrugated polypropylene (1” deep by 1 ½”) S-400 strip vent. Manufacturer: COR-A-VENT (800-837-8368) D. All items of interior standing and running trim and casework, which are noted as "hardwood" or "veneer" on the Contract Drawings shall receive a transparent finish. Items not so labeled shall receive an opaque finish. Finishes are specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishing. 2.02 CABINETRY A. AWI Section 400 B. AWI quality grade: Custom. C. Exposed parts: 1. Solid wood – red oak plain sawn. 2. Veneer – red oak plain sliced. 06 40 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Plywood – MDF core or medium density particleboard core. D. Semi-exposed parts shall be as specified for exposed parts. E. Cabinet construction shall be panel doors with reveal overlay as indicated on the Drawings. F. Finish: Transparent. G. Cabinet Hardware: (Exposed hardware finish to match door hardware 1. Pulls. 2. Full extension drawer slides. 3. Fully concealed hinges. 4. Steel pin shelf supports. 5. Locks where shown. 2.03 WOOD THRESHOLD, WINDOW STOOLS A. AWI Section 100. B. AWI Quality Grade: Custom C. Solid Wood: Red oak plain sawn. 2.04 HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS AND SINK BOARDS A. AWI quality grade - Custom. B. Exposed surfaces - (0.050" thick general-purpose grade)(0.030" thick plastic laminate for post-forming) high pressure laminated plastic, matte finish, color as selected by the Architect. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Formica b) Wilsonart c) Nevamar 06 40 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Concealed surfaces - Laminated plastic backing sheet. D. Countertop core - not less than 3/4" thick particleboard, CS 236, Type 2, medium density, Class 1, conforming to a hardness requirement of 500 pounds. E. Use manufacturer's recommended adhesive for plastic laminate. F. Where backsplashes are shown, also provide side splashes. 2.05 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS A. Provide ½” quartz tops with 1 ½” front edge with 1/8” bevel at top front. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: a) Silestone 2.06 PLASTIC LAMINATE SHELVING (Adjustable) A. AWI quality grade - Custom. B. All surfaces - 0.050" thick general-purpose grade high pressure laminated plastic matte finish, color as selected by the Architect. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Formica b) Wilsonart c) Nevamar C. Shelving core: Not less than 3/4" thick particleboard. D. Use manufacturer's recommended adhesives. E. Hardware: Shelf standards (bored holes) and brackets PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installations shall conform to ASI Section 1700 for the specified quality grade. B. Work included in this Specification shall be installed straight, plumb, level and with closely fitted joints. 1. Blind nailing shall be used to extent practicable, and face nailing shall be set and 06 40 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 stopped with a non-staining putty to match the finish applied. 2. Screws shall be used for attachment to metal. Setting and stopping of screws shall be of same quality as required where nails are used. 3. Joints shall be staggered, concealed, or placed in unobjectionable locations. 4. Molded work shall be coped at returns and interiors angles and mitered at external corners. 5. Intersections of flat work shall be shouldered to ease any inherent change in plane. B. Cabinetry shall be set at locations indicated and securely anchored in plumb, level positions. C. Fillers, furring and trim necessary to make the finish carpentry and millwork installation complete and workable, and all molding necessary to conceal joints at intersections of millwork with walls and ceilings shall be furnished and installed under this Section. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect completed installations from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.03 GUARANTEE A. All items of custom cabinetry and millwork shall be guaranteed in writing by the manufacturer against any defects in material for a period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. The Millwork Contractor shall guarantee in writing to replace all defective work for a period of two (2) years after substantial completion. B. Items showing evidence of such defects within the period of the guarantee shall be repaired or removed and replaced with new work at no expense to the Owner. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 06 61 16 – SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 06 61 16: SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior window stools. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry B. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork C. Section 12 32 00: Manufactured Cabinets and Casework -Wood 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design all items of thickness and with reinforcement of sufficient strength for anticipated load conditions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings showing plans, sections, locations of solid polymer fabrication applications, and installation details. 2. Submit product data and color charts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOLID SURFACING A. One-piece solid surface window stool profiles as indicated. Product shall be “Corian” as manufactured by Dupont, or equal by Formica, WilsonArt, or Samsung. Color and pattern to be selected by Architect. 2.02 SEALANTS AND ADHESIVES A. Color matched, of types recommended by polymer sheet manufacturer to suit Project conditions. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components in compliance with manufacturer’s published recommendations. 06 61 16 – SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fabricate to shapes, dimensions and profiles indicated. B. Finish all exposed edges and corners. C. Handle and install solid polymer fabrication items in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and with approved Shop Drawings. D. Coordinate installation of countertops with substructure support of countertops. E. Provide site touch-up of marred surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. F. Clean solid polymer fabrications items in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION 07 14 00 - WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PAGE 1 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 14 00: WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all waterproofing and related insulation work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 07 21 00: Building Insulation 1.03 APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Acceptable to waterproofing materials manufacturer. B. Minimum five (5) years experience on equivalent projects. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Complete project information and technical data. B. Manufacturer's printed instructions for application of waterproofing. C. Verification of applicator's qualifications. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, with seals and labels intact. B. Store materials in enclosed areas protected from weather, and out of direct rays of sun. C. Store materials off ground. D. Remove damaged materials from site. 07 14 00 - WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PAGE 2 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation during rain or wet weather, or when surfaces are wet. B. Install waterproofing and insulation according to the manufacturer's written installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Foundation Waterproofing Material 1. Vertical Surfaces: Single component, Moisture curing bitumen modified polyurethane waterproofing for spray, trowel or roller application. 2. Horizontal Surfaces: Single component, moisture-curing bitumen modified polyurethane waterproofing for squeegee application. 3. Approved products: a) HLM 5000T, HLM 5000S, HLM 5000R, HLM 5000SL, Hydrocide Liquid Membrane Waterproofing Systems by Sonneborn Building Products. b) Duramem R-500, V-500 and H-500, by Pecora Corporation. c) Approved equal. 4. Use appropriate grade for horizontal or vertical applications and for application method selected. B. Primer for metal surfaces: Manufacturer's recommended. C. Rigid insulation at foundations shall be: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam insulation board, 2" thickness. 2. ASTM C578-91, Type VI. 3. Properties: a) Density: 1.8 lb. per cubic foot, minimum. b) Thermal insulation (ASTM 518-76) at 75 degrees F. 07 14 00 - WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PAGE 3 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 - "K" factor: .20 - "R" value: 5.0 per inch, minimum. c) Compressive strength: 40 psi (ASTM D1621-73). d) Water absorption: less than 0.3 by volume (ASTM D2842-69). e) Vapor transmission: less than 1.1 per inch. 4. Adhesives shall be Contech PL300 or as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 5. Approved manufacturers: a) Styrofoam Highload 40 by Dow Chemical Company. b) Foamular 400 by U. C. Laboratories, Inc. c) Approved equal. D. Protection Board for vertical and horizontal surfaces. 1. 120 mil multilayer black fiberboard ASTM D 2529, D781. 2. Acceptable products: a) Protection Course II, Sonneborn Building Products, Inc., for use with Sonneborn membrane only unless accepted by alternate membrane manufacturer(s). b) Approved equal products meeting specified standards and shown to be compatible with waterproofing membrane. 3. Manufacturer's approved adhesive. E. Vapor barrier: a) 6-mil polyethylene sheet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check that surfaces to receive fluid-applied waterproofing are free of dirt and debris. B. Verify that voids and cracks are filled and that ridges and fins are removed leaving a smooth surface. 07 14 00 - WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PAGE 4 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Check that penetrations of surface are flashed, and covered to prevent entry of waterproofing material. D. Do not commence installation until conditions are satisfactory. E. Examine area to receive insulation to ensure work of preceding trades is complete. F. Check surfaces to receive rigid insulation to assure they are in uniform plane, and free of mortar chips, debris, grease, oil or other material detrimental to insulation. 3.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply waterproofing materials: 1. When temperature is lower than 40° F. or higher than 90° F. 2. During inclement weather. 3. To damp or contaminated surfaces. 4. To areas previously treated with curing or parting compounds, unless these coatings have been completely removed by chemical or mechanical means. 5. To substrates that are wet. 6. To substrates that are over 90° F. 7. To reinforcing bars. B. Concrete surfaces must be properly water cured, at least fourteen (14) days old, and surfaces must be dry. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR WATERPROOFING MATERIAL A. Follow recommendations of waterproofing material manufacturer. B. Immediately prior to application, remove all dust, dirt and other contaminants by vacuuming. C. Air voids, pockmarks or honeycombs shall be opened up to allow waterproofing membrane to fill cavities completely. 07 14 00 - WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PAGE 5 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Joints and cracks less than 1/8" shall be filled by prestripping. Foundation waterproofing material shall be applied so it both fills and overlaps the joint or crack to width of 4" on each side. Thickness of prestripping should be 55 mils. E. All foundation joints over 1/8" wide shall be treated with sealant. After sealant has cured, apply a coat of household carnauba wax, and prestrip as above. Allow pre- stripping to cure before application of final membrane. F. At vertical or horizontal wall intersections, prestripe minimum 6" each way. G. Metal surfaces: Clean to bright metal by sandblasting or wire brushing. Prime with primer. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Waterproofing: 1. Install waterproofing material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply foundation-waterproofing material in a single application, at the rate of 4 gallons per 100 square feet, to produce a cured membrane 55 (+5) mils thick. Total thickness over all prestrip areas should be 110 mils. (55 mils. prestrip material and 55 mils. final membrane.) 3. Install foundation insulation and protection board immediately after curing of waterproofing. 4. Apply horizontal surface waterproofing in two (2) layers. The first layer shall be applied to a thickness of 40 mil. The second layer, or wearing layer, shall be applied to a thickness of 15 mil. Seal the perimeter with manufacturer's approved sealant. 5. All waterproofing joints shall have a minimum 6" lap. B. Foundation Insulation: 1. Adhere insulation to walls in a single layer, in a horizontal position, closely butted and with vertical joints staggered. 2. Apply adhesives to insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 07 14 00 - WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PAGE 6 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Press insulation in place using rocking motion. 4. Fit insulation closely around penetrations. C. Protection Board: 1. Adhere to walls in a single layer, in a horizontal position, tightly butted with vertical joints staggered. 2. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Fit tightly around penetrations. D. Vapor Barrier: 1. Smooth subgrade to prevent damage or rupturing of barrier. 2. Lay film in widest practical widths. Laps, when required, shall be 12" minimum; place top lap in direction of placing concrete. 3. Take care to prevent rupturing of barrier by reinforcing. 3.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. A manufacturer's representative shall be present at the job site immediately prior to and during the initial application of the waterproofing, to insure adherence to the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. Submit manufacturer's written inspection report. B. Before the material attains final set, verify the applied thickness as the work progresses. Take a reading every 100 square feet of surface area. Where readings indicate a thickness less than specified, immediately apply additional membrane to produce required thickness. C. After membrane has cured, visually inspect for voids, damage or rupture. Repair as required to provide complete waterproofing integrity. 3.06 CLEANUP A. Remove adhesive splatters and smears. 07 14 00 - WATERPROOFING - FLUID APPLIED PAGE 7 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Leave work areas in broom clean condition. 3.07 GUARANTEE A. The manufacturer shall guarantee in writing the leakproof performance of the waterproofing installations for a period of five (5) years following acceptance of the work. 3.08 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 21 00: BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of the building insulation work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry B. Division 07: Waterproofing C. Section 07 22 00: Nail Base Roof Insulation 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for all materials specified in this section. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. B. Packaging label shall identify contents, manufacturer, brand name, thermal values and applicable standards. C. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture, direct sunlight and open flame or sparks. D. Remove damaged material from site. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation during rain or wet weather, or when surfaces are wet. 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rigid Insulation at wall assemblies shall be: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam insulation board. 2. ASTM C578, Type IV. 3. Properties: a) Density: 1.6 lb. per cubic foot, minimum. b) Thermal insulation (ASTM 518-76) at 75 degrees F. - "K" factor: .20 at 75 degrees F. - "R" value: 5.0 per inch, minimum c) Compressive strength: 25 psi (ASTM D1621) d) Water absorption: less than 0.3 by volume (ASTM D2842) e) Vapor transmission: Less than 1.1 per inch 4. Thickness: two inches (2") or as indicated on Drawings. 5. Adhesives shall be Contech PL300 or as recommended by the insulation manufacturer: 6. Approved manufacturers: a) Styrofoam Square Edge by Dow Chemical Company. b) Foamular 250 by Owens Corning c) Approved equal. B. Blanket insulations in attics and stud walls shall be: 1. Resilient glass fiber blanket 2. ASTM C665, Type 1 unfaced, 3. Thermal resistance "R": a) R13 for 4" nominal thickness. b) R19 for 6" nominal thickness. c) R25 for 8" nominal thickness. d) R30 for 9" nominal thickness e) R38 for 12" nominal thickness. 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 4. Adhesive: Non-flammable type as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 5. Provide insulation baffle at eave locations to ensure proper ventilation. C. Vapor barrier: 6 mil. polyethylene, ASTM D4397-84, 0.13 perm vapor transmission rating minimum. D. Rigid Foundation insulation at slabs on grade shall be as per Paragraph 2.01(A) above. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine area to receive insulation to ensure work of preceding trades is complete. B. Check surfaces to receive rigid insulation to assure they are in uniform plane, and free of mortar chips, debris, grease, oil or other material detrimental to insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Rigid Insulation: 1. Adhere insulation to walls in a single layer, in a horizontal position, closely butted and with vertical joints staggered. 2. Apply adhesives to insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 3. Press insulation in place using rocking motion. 4. Fit insulation closely around penetrations. B. Blanket Insulation: 1. Install blanket insulation tightly between the ceiling framing members, as shown on the Drawings, with manufacturer's recommended tape. 2. Fit insulation tightly around framing members, leaving no voids. 3. Facing shall face inward. Staple flanges to wood framing members at 8" o.c. 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 maximum, using 9/16" staples in a trigger or power stapler. Use tape at metal framing members. Lap all facings a minimum of 6". C. Vapor barrier at exterior walls: 1. Adhere vapor barrier to the interior face of exterior CMU walls with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Lap all edges a minimum of 6" and at all openings, and fully adhere all laps. 3.03 CLEANUP A. Remove adhesive splatters and smears B. Leave work areas in broom clean condition 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 22 00 - NAIL-BASE ROOF INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 22 00: NAIL-BASE ROOF INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of the building insulation work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 05 31 00: Steel Decking B. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry C. Section 07 26 00: Plastic Sheet Vapor Barrier 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for all materials specified in this section. Include type of screw and location pattern. Indicate staggered joints and offset dimension. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. B. Packaging label shall identify contents, manufacturer, brand name, thermal values and applicable standards. C. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture, direct sunlight and open flame or sparks. D. Remove damaged material from site. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation during rain or wet weather, or when surfaces are wet. 07 22 00 - NAIL-BASE ROOF INSULATION PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nail-base rigid insulation at sloped deck roof. shall consist of: 1. Prefabricated panels consisting of polyisocyanurate foam insulation bonded to 7/16" APA/TECO rated oriented strand board sheathing [with spacers to provide a continuous ventilated space between the insulation and the sheathing]. 2. Nominal thickness of assembly shall be per the Drawings. Where indicated thickness is not available as a manufacturer's standard, thickness may be built-up from additional layers of polyisocyanurate insulation. 3. Required R-values: a) 3-1/2" nominal thickness: R 19 min. 4. Nail-base insulation fasteners shall be as recommended and approved by the insulation manufacturer. 5. Acceptable manufacturers of vented nailbase insulation:: a) Atlas Energy. b) Cornell Corporation. c) Dow Chemical Company d) Hunter Panels e) Johns Manville f) RMAX, Inc. d) Equal as approved under the provisions of Section 01 62 00 and acceptable to the accepted manufacturer of the asphalt shingles for the project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine area to receive nail-base insulation to ensure work of preceding trades is complete. B. Sloped roof nail-base rigid insulation: 1. Stagger joints 07 22 00 - NAIL-BASE ROOF INSULATION PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Install over specified vapor barrier 3. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. The nail-base rigid insulation shall be nailed to the wood roof deck, using manufacturer's approved fasteners and pattern. 4. Provide blocking ledges on high slope roofs, as shown in the Drawings. 5. Lay only as much nail base insulation as may be covered within the day by the completed roof system. 6. Exposed edges left at the end of the day shall be temporarily sealed against the elements. 7. Installed insulation, which has become wet and/or damaged, shall be removed and replaced with solid and dry materials. 3.03 CLEANUP A. Remove adhesive splatters and smears B. Leave work areas in broom clean condition 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 26 00 - PLASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS AND RETARDERS PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 26 00: PLASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS AND RETARDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all plastic sheet vapor barrier and vapor retarderwork in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry D. Section 07 21 00: Building Insulation E. Section 07 53 24: Elastic Sheet Roofing (EPDM) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers data for vapor barrier, adhesive and tape, and written certification that products to be supplied meet this specification. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. B. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture, high temperature, direct sunlight, and open flame on sparks. C. Remove damaged material from the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Plastic sheet for walls, ceilings or roofs: 6-mil polyethylene, ASTM D4397. Maximum vapor transmission rating: 0.13 perm. 07 26 00 - PLASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS AND RETARDERS PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Plastic sheet for slabs on ground: ASTM E1745 Class A. Maximum Vapor Transmission rating: 0.01 perm. 1. Zero-Perm by Alumiseal Corporation 2. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries 3. Premoulded Membrane Vapor Seal by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 4. Equal approved by Architect. C. Adhesive: As recommended by the plastic sheet manufacturer. D. Tape: As approved by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine area to receive vapor barrier to ensure work of preceding trades is complete. Report any defects affecting installation to General contractor for correction. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of the substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Vapor barrier shall be installed as described below at all insulated walls, roofs and ceilings, and beneath all slabs-on-ground. B. Slabs on Ground: 1. Install material per ASTM D1643. 2. Following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs-on-ground, place vapor barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 3. Lap joints 6" and seal with tape per manufacturer's instructions. 4. Seal all penetrations per manufacturer's instructions. C. Exterior Walls: 1. After installation of batt insulation between the studs, apply vapor barrier to interior face of studs with adhesive or staples. 07 26 00 - PLASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS AND RETARDERS PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Lap joints 4" and seal with tape. 3. Seal vapor barrier around electrical boxes with adhesive or tape. D. Nail-base Rigid Insulation over Metal Decking: 1. Loose-lay vapor barrier over deck with long dimension perpendicular to slope of roof. 2. Lap joints 6", upper sheet lapping lower, and seal with tape. 3. Vapor barrier maybe spot-taped or adhered to deck for ease of installation. E. Ceilings: 1. Attach to underside of trusses with adhesive or staples. 2. Lap joints 6" and seal with tape. 3. Run vapor barrier up horizontal surfaces of trussed areas to be insulated. 3.03 CLEAN-UP A. Remove adhesive splatters and smears. B. Remove debris from project site. C. Leave work areas in broom clean condition. END OF SECTION 07 27 00 – AIR BARRIER/WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 27 00 – AIR BARRIER/WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install air barrier/weather resistant barrier over exterior of wall sheathing at all locations regardless of whether or not indicated on drawings to protect exterior sheathing and interior walls. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry B. Section 05 40 00: Cold Formed Metal Framing C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry D. Section 07 62 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials B. Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry C. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Submit product specifications and technical data 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 3. Installation instruction 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install air barrier on wet or damp surfaces. Surfaces should also be free from dirt, oils, lubricants or other debris that may inhibit adhesion of the flashing tape to the substrate. After precipitation, allow a minimum 07 27 00 – AIR BARRIER/WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 of 24 hours for drying before installing the flashing tape. For optimal performance, install air barrier at temperatures above 40 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap®: A flash spunbonded olefin, non-woven, non-perforated secondary weather resistant barrier. B. Performance Characteristics 1. AATCC–127, Water Penetration Resistance, exceeded at 280 2. TAPPI T–460, Gurley Hill (sec/100cc) Air infiltration at >1500 seconds 3. ASTM E 96 Method B(g/m2–24hr.)Water vapor transmission of 200 4. TAPPI T-41D, Basis weight of 2.7oz/yd 5. ASTM E96 Method B, Water Vapor Transmission, 28 perms 6. ASTM E1677, Air Retarder Material Standard Specification, Type I air barrier C. Sealing Tape/Fasteners 1. DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape, DuPont Weatherization Systems. 2. For steel frame construction: DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws, DuPont Weatherization Systems. 1 5/8” rust resistant screws with 2” diameter plastic cap 3. For wood frame construction: DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps, DuPont Weatherization Systems. Nails with large heads or plastic washers. D. Elasticized flexible flashing tape complying with the following: 1. Face Material composition: Elasticized polyethylene laminate. 2. Face color: White. 3. Adhesive composition; Butyl adhesive containing non-halogen fire retardant additive 4. Thickness: > 60 mils. 5. Release liner: 2 part siliconized paper. 6. Elastic Elongation , MD (length @ Full Extension/ Length @ Relaxed): >230% @ 70 F. E. Proprietary Products/Systems: Self Adhering Straight flashing tape, DuPont™ StraightFlash ™ 07 27 00 – AIR BARRIER/WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 F. Durable Polyethlyene Laminate Flashing Tape complying with the following: 1. Face Material composition: Polyethylene laminate 2. Face color: White 3. Adhesive compostion: Butyl adhesive containing fire retardant additive 4. Thickness: 30 mils 5. Release liner: 1 piece siliconized paper G. Sealants: 1. ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant, of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight and are compatible with DuPont™ Tyvek®. 2. Available Products: a. OSI® Quad Pro-Series®; solvent release butyl rubber sealant. b. DAP® DynaFlex 230™. c. Other products as approved and recommended by the flashing tape and air barrier/weather resistant barrier manufacturer. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. DuPont Weatherization Systems : 4417 Lancaster Pike Building 728 Wilmington, DE 19805 2. Architect approved equal prior to bid PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect surfaces to receive air barrier to verify that work of preceding trades is complete and free of conditions which would adversely affect the work of this section Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared to receive, constructed to fully support flashing, and sloped where required to provide positive drainage of water to building exterior. B. Verify that surfaces to receive flashing are thoroughly dry, free from loose materials, and reasonably smooth. 07 27 00 – AIR BARRIER/WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Do not proceed with flashing installations until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. Start of work in any area denotes acceptance of substrate conditions by this subcontractor. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Substrate must be smooth, clean, dry and free of voids, spalled areas, loose substrate, loose nails, other sharp protrusions or other matter that will hinder the adhesion or regularity of the flashing tape installation. Clean loose dust or dirt from surface wherever flashing tape is to be applied by wiping with a clean dry cloth or brush. B. Remove existing weather barriers, flashings, carrier or protective films and similar materials that would impede adhesion from substrates indicated to receive elasticized flexible flashing tape. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 3.03. INSTALLATION A. Install Air Barrier over exterior side of exterior wall sheathing. 1. Install Air Barrier after sheathing is installed and before windows and doors are installed. Install lower level barrier prior to upper layers to ensure proper shingling of layers. 2. Overlap Air Barrier at corners of building by a minimum of 12 inches. 3. Overlap Air Barrier vertical seams by a minimum of 6 inches. 4. Ensure barrier is plumb and level with foundation, and unroll extending Air Barrier over window and door openings. 5. Attach Air Barrier to wood, insulated sheathing board or exterior gypsum with plastic cap nails every 12” to 18” on vertical stud line with wood stud framing, and screws with washers to metal stud framing. When attaching to masonry, use adhesive recommended by manufacturer. 6. Prepare window and door rough openings as follows: a. Prepare each window rough opening by cutting a modified “I” pattern in the Air Barrier. 1. Horizontally cut Air Barrier along bottom of header. 2. Vertically cut Air Barrier down the center of window openings from the top of the window opening down to 2/3 of the way to the bottom of the window openings. 07 27 00 – AIR BARRIER/WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Diagonally cut Air Barrier from the bottom of the vertical cut to the left and right corners of opening. 4. Fold side and bottom flaps into window opening and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess. b. Prepare each rough door opening by cutting a standard “I” pattern in the Air Barrier. 1. Horizontally cut Air Barrier along bottom of door frame header and along top of sill. 2. Vertically cut Air Barrier down the center of door openings from the top of the door opening (header) down to the bottom of the door opening (sill). 3. Fold side flaps inside around door openings and fasten every 6 inches. Trim off excess. 7. Tape all horizontal and vertical seam of Air Barrier with DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape. 8. Seal all tears and cuts in Air Barrier with DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape. B. Install window/door flashings AFTER installation of Weather Resistant Barrier as follows: 1. Prepare weather resistant barrier for window or door installation 2. Make a modified “I-cut” in the Weather Resistant Barrier 3. Cut a flap above the rough opening to allow head flashing installation 4. Fold side and bottom flaps into rough opening and secure. Flip head flap up and temporarily secure 5. Cut FlexWrap™ flashing tape at least 12” longer than width of rough opening sill 6. Remove first piece of release paper, align edge of sill flashing with inside edge of sill, and adhere into rough opening across sill and up jambs (minimum 6”). Sill flashing should not wrap onto interior surface of framing. 7. Remove second release paper. 8. Fan FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall 9. Firmly press sill flashing to insure full adhesion 10. Secure edges of bottom corners with approved sealing tape or mechanical fasteners. 11. Apply continuous bead of caulk to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply caulk across sill 12. Install window/door according to manufacturer’s instructions 13. Remove release paper and install StraightFlash™ jamb flashings overlapping entire mounting flange of both jambs. Extend jamb flashings 6-inches above top of rough opening to below bottom of sill flashing. 14. Remove release paper and install StraightFlash™ as head flashing overlapping 07 27 00 – AIR BARRIER/WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 entire mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings. 15. Flip head flap down over the head flashing 16. Secure flap above window with approved sealing tape 17. Caulk (using backer rod if necessary) to seal rear of window/door frame to rough opening. C. Round-Top Window or Door Head Flashing: 1. Cut head flashing at least 12” longer than the arc length of circle-top window 2. Remove both release papers and install conforming around top of window, covering entire mounting flange. Head flashing should overlap jamb flashings at least 6”. 3. To facilitate installation to round-top window or door heads, remove short lengths of release papers, begin installation, and repeat to work flashing into position and complete installation. 4. Secure outer edges of head flashing with approved sealing tape or mechanical fasteners. 5. Secure flap above window with approved sealing tape. . D. Other Openings and Penetrations: Provide flashings for other openings as required to provide weathertight barrier. Install lapped components to direct water to exterior of building. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly upon completion, remove all scraps, debris and excess material resulting from the work of this section. B. Protect the completed installations from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.05 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 31 13 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 31 13: FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required for the completion of all asphalt shingle and related flashing work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry B. Section 07 21 00: Building Insulation C. Section 07 22 00: Nail-base rigid Insulation D. Section 07 53 05: Membrane Roofing and Flashings E. Section 07 62 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal G. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in sealed packages with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. labels. B. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide labeled materials, which have been tested and listed as Type A by U.L. for class and rating indicated for each shingle type required. B. Installer: Company specializing in shingle work of comparable scope with a minimum of five (5) years experience. C. Maintain one (1) copy of manufacturer's application instructions on the site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS 07 31 13 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Submit specifications, installation instructions, and requirements of the manufacturer. B. Submit full range of samples for color and texture selection. C. Provide shingle manufacturer's warranty on installed work; manufacturer shall agree to pay for repair or replacement of defective shingles as necessary to eliminate leaks for a period of two (2) years after the Date of Substantial Completion. D. Provide shingle manufacturer's written pro-rated limited material warranty. E. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance from an independent laboratory indicating that the asphalt fiber glass shingles made in normal production meet or exceed the requirements of: 1. ASTM E108/UL 790 Class A Fire Resistance 2. ASTM D3161/UL 997 Type I Wind Resistance 3. ASTM D3462 Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Fiberglass) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 UNDERLAYMENT A. Non-Asphaltic Fiberglass-Based Underlayment 42” wide, to be Versa Shield by Elk Premium Roofing, or approved equal. 2.02 SELF-ADHERED WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. A self-adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to polyethylene sheathing, "Ice and Water Shield" as manufactured by W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, Massachusetts 02140, or approved equal. 2.03 BITUMINOUS PLASTIC CEMENT A. ASTM D4586, asbestos free. 2.04 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Shingles shall be, mineral surfaced, fiberglass based asphalt strip shingle, self-sealing, complying with ASTM D3018, Type I, bearing a U.L. Class "A" label for external fire exposure and a U.L. "Wind Resistant" label, and algae resistant with a 40 year material warranty; as manufactured by CertainTeed “Hatteras,” Color “Outer Banks” 07 31 13 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 2.05 FASTENERS A. Nails: Hot-dip galvanized or aluminum, 11 or 12 gauge barbed shank, 3/8" head, sharp pointed conventional, of sufficient length to penetrate through sheathing, or 3/4" into solid wood decking. STAPLES ARE NOT PERMITTED. 2.06 FLASHINGS A. Vent pipe flashing: Premolded neoprene pipe seal with integral base flashing and stainless steel clamping ring, as approved by shingle manufacturer. B. Metal drip edges at Eave and Rake: Continuous prefinished aluminum per SMACNA manual Figure 4-22C with extended top edge. Color as selected by Architect. 2.07 RIDGE VENT A. Continuous Ridge Vent: Model Shingle Vent II as manufactured by Air-Vent, Inc. Inc., (800) 247-8368 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install underlayment of shingles on wet surfaces. B. Do not apply shingles when air temperature is below 40°F. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Assure that surfaces to which underlayment and shingles are to be applied are uniform, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free of irregularities, ridges, warps or voids. B. Verify that installation of waterproof membrane and metal flashing has been completed. C. Verify that work of other trades that penetrate roof deck has been completed: plumbing stacks, vents, etc. D. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 07 31 13 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install metal drip edges at eaves and rakes before application of waterproof membrane, and underlayment is in place. B. Self- adhered waterproof membrane: 1. Eaves: install a single course of waterproof membrane parallel with the eave, extending from the roof edge to a line 36" above the interior face of the exterior wall up the slope. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Valley: install continuous 36" self-adhered waterproof membrane, both sides of valley, extending full length of valley. 3. Hips, Rakes, crickets and roof penetrations or abutting walls: install continuous self-adhered waterproof membrane. C. Install underlayment, asphalt shingles and related materials in accordance with the shingle manufacturer's printed instructions. Notify Architect if manufacturer's instructions are in conflict with these documents. D. Underlayment: 1. Apply two layers of underlayment parallel with the eaves, laying first 21" as starter course, overlapping with 42" second layer. Starter course shall overlap the waterproof membrane 6". 2. Cover roof with 42" sheets of underlayment overlapping preceding layer by 22", exposing 20" of underlying sheet. 3. Secure underlayment to deck with sufficient fasteners to hold in place until shingles are applied. 4. Omit underlayment at self-adhered waterproof membrane. E. Valleys: Closed-cut type. WOVEN VALLEYS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. F. Starter strip: Use shingles with tabs cut off as a starter strip. 1. Overhang metal edging at eaves and rake by 1/2". 2. Fasten starter strip using same spacing as for shingles. Locate fasteners 3" up 07 31 13 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 from bottom edge. Avoid fastening where cut outs will occur on the first course of shingles. G. Shingle application: Install shingles in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Horizontal offset - 6". 2. Provide 1/2" overhang at both rake and eaves. 3. For best distribution of color blend, each row shall be run at least four shingles across the roof before proceeding to next row. 4. Nailing - Four nails per shingle, 1" from each end and 12" in from each end, all on a line 5-5/8" above the butt edge and just below the self-sealing stripe. Nail shingles in place through double thickness area designated by fastener line, (and) (or) between and in line with sealant dots if no fastener line. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for slope and anticipated wind conditions. 5. Cap hips and ridges with Seal-A-Ridge, maintaining weather exposure to match adjacent shingles. Place to avoid exposed nails. 3.04 FIELD PAINTING ROOF ACCESSORIES A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations to leave in proper condition to accept field applied coatings. B. Field paint flues and vent stacks using Elk Roof Accessory Paint. Color as selected by the Architect. 3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Replace damaged shingles. B. Remove from the project site all excess material not part of extra stock and debris resulting from work of this section. 3.06 WARRANTY A. Materials: Provide the shingle manufacturer's written 40 year prorated limited material warranty. 07 31 13 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Workmanship: the applicator shall warranty the completed asphalt shingle installation against defects in workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. 3.07 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a minimum of twelve (12) full bundles of shingles for the Owner's future use. 3.08 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed off the site by this Contractor. Burning on site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 62 00: FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all shop or field fabricated flashing and sheet metal work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry B. Section 04 41 30: Limestone Rubble Veneer C. Section 06 18 10: Architectural Glued Laminated Units D. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants E. Section 09 22 00: Stucco 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" (Fifth Edition 1993), published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. is hereby incorporated by reference. B. The National Roofing Contractors Association "A Manual of Practice", 1989 edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings are required for all shop-fabricated items. B. Show details, layouts, weights, gauges or thicknesses of metal, joining, expansion joint spacing, anchoring and installation procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLASHING MATERIALS 07 62 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 A.. Flashing: 1. Aluminum -Organic coated 0.032" or 0.050” thick sheet aluminum, alloy 3003, temper H14. B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or, other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Utilize lead, nylon or plastic expansion inserts at copings. C. Bituminous coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. E Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,; Sonnaborne Sonolastic NP-1, Tremco Dymonic, Pecora Dynatrol 1. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by sheet metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints. G. Adhesives: Type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof/weather- resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. H. Metal accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gauge required for performance. I. Gutter and conductor-head guards: 20 gauge bronze or non-magnetic stainless steel mesh or fabricated units, with selvaged edges and noncorrosive fasteners. Select materials for compatibility with gutters and downspouts. J . Elastic flashing filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed-cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. K. Roofing cement: ASTM D2822, asphaltic. 2.02 SHEET METAL ITEMS 07 62 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Gutters shall be continuous seamless Ogee style K hanging gutters, based on SMACNA Figure I-18B, At existing gutters match existing size. 1. Material shall be Aluminum 0.032" thick 2. Provide matching accessories - ends, slip joint connections, expansion joints, drip edge. 3. Provide expansion joints where shown (maximum 50 feet). 4. Expansion joints shall be per SMACNA Figure 1-8. 5. Downspouts shall be matching 5”corrugated rectangular. B. Valleys shall be per SMACNA Figure 4-9. 1. Material shall be Aluminum 0.032" thick. 2. Extend up each slope 10" minimum, with 1" center crimp and cleats at 2"-0" o.c. Lap joints 8". C. Two-piece counter flashing shall be per SMACNA Figure 4-3A or products of similar design by Fry Reglet, Keystone Flashing Company or approved equal. 1. Material shall be Aluminum 0.032".thick 2. Flashing receiver to be as detailed or as appropriate for wall type. D. Stepped base and counter flashing shall be per SMACNA Figure 4-7A. 1. Material shall be Aluminum 0.032" thick. E. Coping and counter flashing shall be per SMACNA Figure 4-7A and Architect’s detail. 1. Material shall be Aluminum 0.050" thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 07 62 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Inspect surfaces to receive flashing and sheet metal work to verify that work of preceding trades is complete and free of conditions which would adversely affect the work of this section. B. Report any unacceptable conditions to the Architect. C. Do not proceed with flashing and sheet metal installations until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. Start of work in any area denotes acceptance of substrate conditions by this subcontractor. 3.02 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. All flashing fabrications and installations shall comply with the Contract Drawings and the recommendations of the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition". B. All inside and outside corner sections shall be shop fabricated. C. Furnish formed sections in eight foot to ten foot lengths. Shorter pieces may be used to connect to factory-fabricated inside and outside corners, and at ends of runs. D. Perforations in flashings made by anchors shall be covered up by the use of fasteners with expandable rubber washers. E. Cutting, fitting, drilling and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate work of other trades shall be performed by sheet metal mechanics. F. Provide all accessories and other items required to complete the sheet metal installation, whether specifically mentioned or not. G. Provide necessary furring and attachment for the flashing system as required for a complete installation. H. Provide weathertight juncture where sheet metal abuts or extends into adjacent materials. I. Install all work with laps, joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. J. Electrolytic Prevention: Contact between dissimilar flashing materials shall receive a protective coating for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion. 07 62 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 K. Install sealant at all gutter, downspout, flashing and expansion joints. L. Provide dams at ends of non-continuous flashings. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly upon completion, remove all scraps, debris and excess material resulting from the work of this section. B. Clean all exposed surfaces after completion of installation. C. Protect the completed installations from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 1 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 84 00: FIRESTOPPING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide firestop systems consisting of a material, or combination of materials installed to retain the integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and/or hot gases through penetrations, blank openings, construction joints, or at perimeter fire containment in or adjacent to fire-rated barriers in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code for this project. B. Firestop systems shall be used in locations including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof assemblies requiring protected openings including both empty openings and openings that contain penetrations. 2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated wall assemblies including both empty openings and openings that contain penetrations. 3. Membrane penetrations in fire-resistance-rated wall assemblies where items penetrate one side of the barrier. 4. Joints in fire-resistance-rated assemblies to allow independent movement. 5. Perimeter Fire Barrier System between a rated floor/roof and an exterior wall assembly. 6. Joints, through penetrations and membrane penetrations in Smoke Barriers and Smoke Partitions. C. All firestopping shall be in accordance with this section. D. All disciplines of firestopping (mechanical, electrical and general) shall be by the same subcontractor. 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 2 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specification Sections that relate directly to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to: 1. Division 3 - Cast-in-Place Concrete; Concrete work 2. Division 4 - Unit Masonry 3. Division 5 - Expansion, Control, and SEISMIC Joints 4. Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 5. Division 8 - Glass, Glazing and Metal Curtain Wall Systems 6. Division 9 - Gypsum Wallboard 7. Division 21 - Fire Suppression 8. Division 22 - Plumbing 9. Division 23 - HAVAC 10. Division 26 - Electrical 11. Division 27 - Communications 12. Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Communication 1.03 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials b. E 119 Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials c. E 136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750F d. E 814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops 2. Factory Mutual (FM) Research: a. FM Approval Standard of Firestop Contractors – Class 4991 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. UL 263 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials b. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 3 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 c. UL 1479 Fire-Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops d. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems 4. Indiana Building Code, latest edition. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Penetrations: Provide and install firestopping systems that are produced to resist the spread of fire, and the passage of smoke and other gases according to requirements indicated, including but not limited to the following: 1. Firestop all penetrations passing through fire resistance rated wall and floor assemblies and other locations as indicated on the drawings. 2. Provide and install complete penetration firestopping systems that have been tested and approved by third party testing agency. 3. F - Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through- penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than one hour or the fire-resistance rating of the construction being penetrated. 4. T - Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated by Code. 5. L – Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide firestop systems with L ratings, in addition to F and T ratings, as determined per UL 1479, where indicated by Code. 6. W – Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide firestop systems with W Water Resistance ratings, in addition to F, T and L ratings, as determined per UL 1479, where indicated. B. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems: Provide interior perimeter joint systems with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 2307, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the floor construction. C. Fire-Resistive Joints: Provide joint systems with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per UL 2079, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 4 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 D. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide appropriate firestop systems for these conditions. E. Where there is no specific third party tested and classified firestop system available for a particular firestop configuration, the firestopping contractor shall obtain from the firestop manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly (EFFRA) for submittal. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. B. Submit Manufacturers Product Data Sheets for each type of product selected. Certify that Firestop Material shall be asbestos free and complies with local regulations. 1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC’s) and are nontoxic to building occupants. C. Submit system design listings, including illustrations from a qualified testing and inspection agency that is applicable to each firestop configuration. 1. Where there is no specific third party tested and classified Firestop System available for particular firestop configuration, the firestopping contractor shall obtain from the firestop manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly (EFRRA) for submittal. D. Submit contractor qualifications as noted in “Quality Assurance” article. E. Firestop Penetration Log: The firestopping subcontractor shall provide a log listing the location of each protected penetration, the firestop system manufacturer, and the listed system. Reference the identification labels required in Section 3.08. F. MSDS Sheets for each product to be used shall be provided to the individual responsible for site coordination of MSDS information. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping System Design Listing 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 5 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 by a testing and inspection agency in accordance with the appropriate ASTM Standard(s) per article 1.04. A qualified testing and inspection agency may be UL, FM Research, Intertek Testing Services, Omega Point Laboratories (OPL) or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop materials that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. B. Contractor Qualifications: Acceptable contractors shall meet at least two (2) of the following criteria: 1. FM Approved in accordance with FM Standard 4991 – Approval of Firestop Contractors. 2. Shown to have successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects. Demonstrating successful completion includes, but is not limited to providing: a. Letters of reference from the building owner and design firm attesting to the contractor’s performance on the project in question. b. Ability to provide a listing of the number and types of penetrations on each job. 3. Completion of the manufacturer’s certified product installation training for each manufacturer of firestopping installed. A manufacturer’s willingness to sell its firestop system products to a contractor or to an installer engaged by the contractor does not, in itself, confer qualification on the buyer. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single primary firestop systems manufacturer. 1. Materials of different manufacture than allowed by the tested and listed system shall not be intermixed in the same firestop system or opening. 2. Tested and listed firestop systems are to be used before an Engineering Judgment (EJ) or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly (EFRRA) is installed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer. 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 6 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Store and handle firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. B. Ventilation: Ventilate per firestopping manufacturers' instructions or Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Project coordination is essential to inform and educate all the parties involved with the firestopping process of their role and how they can affect firestopping on the project. A pre-construction meeting shall be scheduled and required for all parties involved prior to the start of construction. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS A. All materials shall be asbestos free and comply with local VOC Regulations. B. If required, hazardous disposal of firestop materials shall be strictly observed as noted on the individual MSDS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Systems listed by approved testing agencies, as identified in Part 1 above, may be used, providing they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through- penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated on the drawings. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 7 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Specified Technologies Incorporated 2. 3M Fire Protection Products 3. Hilti 4. United States Gypsum Company 5. Or owner approved equal PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Notify the responsible party or parties of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond. Do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing the firestopping seal with substrates. C. Verify that system components are clean, dry, and ready for installation. D. Verify that field dimensions are as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLING PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 8 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. 1. Coordinate with other trades to assure that all pipes, conduit, cable, and other items, which penetrate fire rated construction, have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestop assemblies. 2. Schedule the work to assure that partitions and all other construction that conceals penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of firestop and smoke seals. B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Install materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces. 3.04 INSTALLING FIRESTOP JOINT SYSTEMS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and with the firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. 1. Install joint fillers to provide support of firestop materials during application and at the position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed firestop material relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. B. Install systems by proven techniques that result in firestop materials: 1. Directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates. 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 9 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, 3. Providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimize movement capability. C. Tool non-sag firestop materials immediately after their application and prior to the time skinning or begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to: 1. Produce fire-resistance rating. 2. To eliminate air pockets. 3. To ensure contact and adhesion with sides of joint. 3.05 INSTALLING PERIMETER FIRE BARRIER SYSTEMS A. General: Comply with “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1 and with the firestop manufacture’s installation and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install metal framing, curtain wall insulation, mechanical attachments, safing materials and firestop materials as applicable within the system design. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The inspector shall advise the contractor of any deficiencies noted. B. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until inspection agency has verified that the firestop installation complies with the requirements. C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace the firestopping so that it complies with requirements of tested and listed system design. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses. Use methods and cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and or assemblies in which openings and joints occur. 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PAGE 10 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances. If damage caused by others, owner and general contractor to instruct firestop contractor to make appropriate repairs and charge to appropriate trades. 3.08 LABELING A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self- adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels. 1. The words: “Warning – Through – Penetration Firestop system – Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage.” 2. Contractor’s name, address and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer’s name. 6. Installer’s name. END OF SECTION 07 86 00 - SMOKESTOPPING PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 86 00: SMOKESTOPPING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all smokestopping in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete B Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard C. Division 22: Plumbing D. Division 23: HVAC E. Division 26: Electrical 1.03 DEFINITION A. Smokestopping: Material or combination of materials to retain integrity of fire rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of smoke and gases. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating product characteristics, performance and limiting criteria. B. Shop Drawings: Show typical installation details for methods of installation. C. Documentation of qualifications as specialty contractor may be required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to applicable governing codes: 1. Indiana Building Code Current Edition. 07 86 00 - SMOKESTOPPING PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Installer specializing in firestopping and smokestopping installation with no less than two (2) years experience, and approved by the manufacturer or manufacturer's representative. C. Obtain smokestop materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels indicating brand names. B. Store and protect accepted materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate this work as required with work of other trades. The smokestop installation for all trades shall be by a single contractor. B. The General Contractor will supervise and coordinate making penetration areas accessible to smokestop contractor. (Keep smokestop installer ahead of drywall contractor who conceals penetrations.) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Interior stud and drywall partitions: 1. Base of wall: acoustical sealant by drywall contractor – Section 09 21 16. 2. Pipe penetrations and conduit penetrations: fire foam. 3. Duct penetrations: elastomeric firestop sealant. 4. Top of partition (under floor or roof): spray mastic. 5. Cable tray penetrations: fire block. B. Floors: 07 86 00 - SMOKESTOPPING PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Pipe and conduit penetrations: self-leveling firestop sealant. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Hilti 2. 3M 3. STI 4. Tremco 5. Grace 2.02 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Maintain effective barrier against smoke and hot gases per ASTM E814 and UL 1479. B. Materials shall be suitable for sealing of penetrations by steel, glass plastic and insulated pipe. Also flexible cable, buss duct and cable tray. C. Materials shall contain no asbestos. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive penetration sealant, foam or mastic and report unacceptable conditions before starting work. Start of work indicates specialty contractor's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean penetration holes of dirt, loose materials and foreign matter which may affect bond or installation. B. Remove coatings such as paint, curing compounds, water repellant and sealers as required. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Prepare and apply penetration sealing system in accordance with manufacturer's 07 86 00 - SMOKESTOPPING PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 printed instructions. B. Employ installation techniques which will insure that material is deposited to fill and seal holes and openings and ensure effective barrier against smoke and hot gases. C. Tool exposed surfaces of applied sealant smooth. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Where "smoke partitions" are indicated on architectural drawings, it shall be provided under this section. B. Refer to Divisions 22, 23 and 26 for responsibilities concerning openings created by mechanical and electrical trades. C. It is intended that this contractor provides smoke seals for all trades. 3.05 CLEANUP A. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed joints free of excess sealant and soiling from this work as work progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent recommended in writing by the sealant manufacturer. B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition. 3.06 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 1 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 92 00: JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all sealant and caulking work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. All sealant work required for the Project is included under this Section except as specifically noted elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section32 13 00: Concrete Walks, Ramps, Steps and Curbing B. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete C. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry D. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork E. Section 07 24 00: Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) F. Section 07 53 24: Elastic Sheet Roofing (EPDM) and Flashings - Ballasted G. Section 08 81 00: Glass and Glazing H. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wall Board I. Section 09 30 13: Ceramic Tile J. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Finishing 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. All sealant work shall be installed by qualified craftsperson’s skilled in this trade, not by other trades as work incidental to their trade. 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 2 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data, color chart and bead samples. Data shall indicate conformity to reference standards listed below. Include requirements for primers, if any. B. Submit schedule of products listing use locations. C. Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply to selected joints for verification of colors selected and to represent completed work for qualities of appearances, materials and application. D. Upon completion of the project, provide to the Owner two (2) tubes of each type and color sealant utilized for the Owner's future use. 1.05 MATERIALS, DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in sealed containers with the manufacturer's original labels intact. B. Labels shall cite product name and designation, expiration date, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions. C. Store and handle materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperature, and contamination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Type 1 Sealant - General exterior and interior use: A one part polyurethane complying with Federal Specification TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A, and ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS. Movement capacity + 25%. 1. Acceptable products and manufacturers: a) Dymonic, Tremco b) Sonolastic NPI, Sonneborn 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 3 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 c) Dynatrol I-XL, Pecora Corporation d) Dynaflex 230, DAP B. Type 2 Sealant - Exterior movement use: A multicomponent polyurethane sealant complying with Federal Specification TT-S- 00227E, Type II, Class A, and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS. Movement capacity + 50%. 1. Acceptable products and manufacturers: a) Dymeric, Tremco b) Sonolastic NP2, Sonneborn c) Dynatrol II, Pecora Corporation C. Type 3 Sealant - Pavement: Multicomponent polyurethane, pourable or low sag as applicable, complying with Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A and ASTM 920. Movement capacity + 25%. (Note: See Section 03300 - Concrete for Sealants in Floor Slabs.) 1. Acceptable products and manufacturers: a) THC-900 or THC-901, Tremco b) Sonolastic SL2, Sonneborn c) Urexpan NR-200, Pecora Corporation D. Type 4 Sealant - Paintable Interior: One part acrylic latex sealant, complying with ASTM C834. 1. Acceptable products and manufacturers: a) Sonolac, Sonneborn b) AC20, Pecora Corporation c) Alex Plus DAP E. Type 5 Sealant - Toilet Rooms: Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant complying with ASTM C920 and TT-S-0230C, 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 4 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 white. 1. Acceptable products and manufacturers: a) Proglaze, Tremco b) Sonolastic Omniplus, Sonneborn c) No. 898, Pecora Corporation d) No. 786, Dow Corning e) DAP Titanium F. Precompressed Tape Sealant: Self-expanding polyurethane foam with pressure sensitive adhesive on one size. 1. Acceptable products and manufacturers: a) Willseal No. 3122, Illbruck, Minneapolis, MN (612) 521-3555 b) Polylite "Standard", Polylite Manufacturing Corporation (800) 776-0930 G. Primer and bond breakers shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. H. Joint Fillers: 1. Typical Sealant: Closed Cell, non-staining, non-absorbent backer rod. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a) Hercules b) Williams Expand-O-Foam Cord c) Approved equal 3. For silicone sealant, use open cell polyurethane backer rod. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a) Denver Foam b) Approved equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 5 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 3.01 PREPARATION A. Joints and surfaces which are to be caulked or sealed shall be clean, dry and free of dust, loose mortar and other foreign materials. B. Clean ferrous metal of all rust, mill scale and coatings by wire brush, grinding, or sandblasting. Remove oil, grease and/or temporary protective coatings with high performance cleaners, as approved by sealant manufacturer, such as Tremco No. 200 Cleaner. C. Joint dimensions for sealant should be reviewed and installed in accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. In no case should the sealant application be less than 1/4" wide, and 1/4" deep, except in specific metal-to-metal curtain wall applications, and then as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. D. Precast, poured-in-place, or masonry joint surfaces shall be wire brushed, then air blown clean. The joint interface must be free of form release agents or chemical retarders, which may interfere with sealant adhesion and performance. E. Sealants shall not be applied to masonry joints where a water repellent or masonry preservative has been applied prior to caulking. Waterproofing treatments should be applied after caulking, when called for. F. Do not caulk joints until they are in compliance with requirements of the approved manufacturer or the materials, the details as shown on the drawings, and the specific requirements of other sections of the specification. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Install joint backing with a blunt instrument so as not to puncture the surface skin. Size of joint backing should be determined by taking the joint width and adding 25% to assure proper compression of the backer rod. B. Install pre-compressed foam sealant in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. A bond breaker is required between this foam sealant and the fluid sealant. C. Apply sealant with a caulking gun, using proper nozzles. Use sufficient pressure to properly fill the joints with sealant to the back-up material. D. After joints have been completely filled, they shall be neatly tooled to eliminate air 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 6 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 pockets or voids, and to provide a smooth, neat appearing finish in intimate contact with interfaces. After tooling, surface of sealant shall be free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. Edges shall be straight and neat. E. Immediately clean adjacent materials which have been soiled; leave work in a neat, clean condition. F. Major authorities recommend a 40 degrees F. minimum application temperature for joint sealant installation because of the possibility of moisture and/or frost contamination and sealing surfaces. However, it is recognized the application may be necessary at lower temperatures. When this is necessary, steps must be taken to assure clean, dry, frost-free surfaces, and must be approved by the Architect. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality in accordance with the best practice and in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being used. The contractor shall be prepared to show evidence of workmanship of jobs at least five (5) years old. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. The following is a general schedule of sealant work, but not necessarily all inclusive. B. Type 1 Sealant: 1. Joints between exterior metal and masonry or concrete. 2. Joints between differing materials at the exterior, exclusive of expansion joints. 3. Interior expansion and control joints, including joints between masonry partition and exterior walls or bearing walls. 4. Setting bed for exterior thresholds. 5. Exterior joint between steel lintels and supported masonry. 6. Exposed joints between masonry and overhead construction or adjoining steel framing. C. Type 2 Sealant: 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 7 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Exterior expansion and control joints. 2. Coping joints. 3. Joints between pre-cast concrete and poured-in-place concrete. D. Type 3 Sealant: 1. Exterior pavement expansion joints. 2. Joints between exterior pavement and building. E. Type 4 Sealant: 1. Interior frame perimeters. 2. Interior joints between differing materials. 3. General interior work. F. Type 5 Sealant: 1. Joints in and around wet area countertops or lavatory vanities. 2. Joints around all toilet accessories. G. Precompressed Tape Sealant: 1. In masonry at expansion joint between existing building and addition, in conjunction with Type 2 sealant topping at exterior locations. 3.05 CLEANUP A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, trash and equipment as is necessary to provide a finished product. Remove all sealant smears and overruns. 3.06 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 1 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 07 95 00: EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform all operations required for complete installation of Expansion Control and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. B. Work Included: The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Floor expansion joint cover assemblies. 2.. Floor/wall expansion joint cover assemblies. 3. Wall/ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies. 4. Exterior expansion joint assemblies. 5. Roof expansion joint assemblies. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00: Concrete B. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to all applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Loading Characteristics: 1. Standard Floor Covers: Shall be designed to withstand a minimum load of 500 lbs. without damage or permanent deformation. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain expansion joint cover assemblies and fire barrier systems from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.04 REFERENCES 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 2 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 A. ASTM B209 - Standard specification for aluminum and aluminum-alloy sheet and plate. B. ASTM B211 - Standard specification for aluminum and aluminum-alloy extruded bars, rods, wire, shapes and tubes. C. ASTM B36/B36M - Standard specification for brass plate, sheet, strip, and rolled bar. D. ASTM D2287 - Standard specification for nonrigid-vinyl-chloride polymer/copolymer moulding/extrusion compounds. E. UL 2079 - Standard test for fire resistance of building joint systems. F. ASTM E1399 - Standard test for cyclic movement and measuring the minimum and maximum joint widths of architectural joints systems. G. ASTM D1418-77-CR-standard specification for rubber and rubber lattices, neoprene (poly-chloroprene). 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are fabricated and delivered to the site. Data to clearly indicate movement capability of cover assemblies and suitability of material used in exterior seals for UV exposure. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval and obtain approval prior to fabrication and shipment of materials to the job site. 1. Shop Drawings showing full extend of expansion joint cover assemblies; include large-scale details indicating profiles of each type of expansion joint cover assembly, splice joints between sections, joinery with other types, special end conditions, anchorages, fasteners, and relationship to adjoining work and finishes. Include description of materials and finishes and installation instructions. C. Samples: Samples of materials specified herein shall be submitted for approval, and approval obtained before materials are delivered to the site. Samples shall include the following: 1. Samples for each type of metal finish indicated on metal of same thickness and alloy to be used to work. Where normal color and texture variation are to be 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 3 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 expected. Include 2 or more units in each set of samples showing limits of such variations. 2. Six inch (6") ling sample of each type of expansion joint cover assembly specified herein. 3. Samples of each type of flexible seal to be used in work with color samples as above. 1.06 DELIVERY, STOARGE AND HANDLING A. Exercise proper care in the handling of all work so as not to injure the finished surface, and take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place. B. Deliver materials to the job site ready for use, and fabricated in as large sections and assemblies as practical. Assemblies shall be identical to submitted and reviewed shop drawings, samples and certificates. C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. Remove materials that are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials at not additional cost. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where necessary, check actual locations of walls and other construction to which work must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings and coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Expansion joint cover assemblies specified herein and indicated on the drawings shall be as manufactured by MM Systems Corporation, Pendergrass, GA 30567 or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A36 B. Steel Plates: ASTM A283 Grade C 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 4 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A786 D. Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6, sheet and plate. 1. Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious materials with heavy metal free high solids primer or chromate conversion coating. B. Neoprene: Type N-60 mill sheet, black. C. Extruded Preformed Seals: Single or multilayered rubber extrusions as classified under ASTM D2000, designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles and formed to fit compatible frames, in color indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected by architect from manufacturer's standard colors. D. Exterior Seals: Typically two single layered flexible extrusions, one interior PVC and one exterior Santoprene 8000 Series non-hydroscopic, thermoplastic rubber, as classified under ASTM D 2000, retained in a set of compatible frames, in color indicated, as selected by architect from manufacturer's standard colors. E. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible vapor seals and filler materials, drain tubes, adhesive and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. 2.03 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION A. Floor-to-floor expansion joint covers, finished spaces. 1. Fabricate for one inch (1") expansion joints. 2. Covers shall accommodate up to +/- 25% joint width movement. 3. Factory assembled. 4. Model FSS R100, or approved equal. B. Ceiling to Ceiling. 1. Fabricate for one inch (1") expansion joints. 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 5 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Covers shall accommodate up to +/- 25% joint width movement. 3. Factory assembled. 4. Model FSW100, or approved equal. C. Interior Wall -to-wall expansion joint covers, 1. Fabricate for one inch (1") expansion joints. 2. Covers shall accommodate up to +/- 25% joint width movement. 3. Factory assembled. 4. Compressible filler strips - black neoprene. 5. Model EX-J-1, or approved equal. D. Exterior roof-to-wall expansion joint covers (roof bellows). 1. Fabricate for one inch (1") expansion joints. 2. Bellows shall accommodate up to +/- 25% of the joint width movement. 3. Custom factory fabricated transitions and ends. 4. Continuous water-tight barrier. 5. Model ERJL, or approved equal. E. Exterior wall-to-wall expansion joint covers. Sealant 2.09 FABRICATION A. General: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Select units comparable to those indicated or required to accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surface, and structural movement. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline-mitered corners where joint changes directions or abuts other materials. 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 6 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corner, curbs, cross- connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies. B. Metal Finishes 1. Comply with NAAM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are fabricated. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces with protective covering before shipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Make a thorough examination of all surfaces receiving the work of this section and before starting the installation, notify the Architect, in writing, of any defect which would affect the satisfactory completion of work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this section. B. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and schedule of the work of this section and with the work of related trades, with particular attention given to the installation of items embedded in concrete and masonry so as not to delay job progress. C. Provide all templates as required to related trades for location of all support and anchorage items. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for all phases of work, including preparation of substrate, applying materials, and protection of installed units. B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing expansion joint cover assemblies to in-pace construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in fasteners for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suite type of construction 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 7 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 indicated and provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies. C. Perform all cutting, drilling fitting required for installation of expansion joint covers. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. D. Allow adequate free movement for thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling. E. Set floor covers at elevations to be flush with adjacent finished floor materials. If necessary, shim to level, but ensure base frames have continual support to prevent rocking and vertical deflection. F. Locate covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Securely attach in place with all required accessories. G. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than three inches (3") from each end and not more than 24 inches (24") on centers. H. Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with end joints held to a minimum and metal members aligned mechanically using splice joints. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames. I. Adhere flexible filler materials (if any) to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Installation of Extruded Preformed seals: Install seals to comply with manufacturer's instruction and with minimum number of end joints. 2. For straight sections provide preformed seals in continuous lengths. 3. Vulcanize or heat-seal all field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer's recommended procedure. 4. Apply manufacturer's approved adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant-adhesive to both frame interfaces prior to installing preformed seal. 5. Seal transitions in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. J. Installation of Exterior Seal Joint Assemblies 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PAGE 8 OF 8 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Seal all end joints within continuous runs and joints at transitions in accordance with manufacturer's directions to provide a watertight installation. 2. Install exterior flexible seal in standard lengths. 3. Seal transitions and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install secondary seals in continuous lengths; vulcanize all field splice joints in secondary seal material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 11 13: HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all standard and custom hollow metal door and frame work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 08 71 00: Finish Hardware B. Section 08 81 00: Glass and Glazing 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. S.D.I. 100 - RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES, Steel Door Institute. B. ANSI A115 - STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE, American National Standards Institute. C. NFPA80 Fire-rated assemblies. D. Thermal rated assemblies ASTM C236-89 or ASTM C976-90. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data, including manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions. B. Shop drawings including illustrations and schedule of door and frame sizes, types, materials, construction, finishing, anchoring, accessories and preparation for hardware. C. Manufacturer's written certification that materials meet specification requirements. D. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 products are used in conjunction with these hollow metal items. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction , for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. C. Fire labeled doors and frames shall be tested pe45 UL 10C to meet requirements of positive pressure fire rating. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All steel doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the door schedule. B. Deliver all steel doors in cartons and pelletized to provide protection during transit and job storage. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect. D. Store doors and frames at the building site under cover. Place units on wood sills or on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non- vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Installer must examine the conditions under which steel doors and frames will be installed and notify the contractor in writing of any condition detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Sheet Steel: Commercial quality carbon steel, cold-rolled, annealed, and free from scale, pitting, rust or other defects. ASTM A366 or A620 for doors, ASTM A366 or A568 for frames. 1. Sheet steel for all parts of doors and frames on the exterior and where scheduled shall be galvanized, mill-phosphatized stock bearing 0.60 ounces of zinc per square foot A60 (ASTM A525). If interior parts, such as reinforcing, are not galvanized, they shall be primed with rust-resistant primer. If doors and frames scheduled to be galvanized contain parts, which are not corrosion-protected, they will be rejected. 2. Gauges: a) Interior frames - 16 gauge, mitered corners. b) Exterior frames - 14 gauge, mitered corners. c) Interior doors - 18 gauge, Grade II, heavy-duty. d) Exterior doors - 16 gauge, Grade III, extra heavy-duty . e) Reinforcement for hardware - in accordance with Steel Door Institute Standard (S.D.I.) 100, Table IV. f) Glass moldings - 20 gauge. g) Louvers - 20 gauge. B. Primer: 1. For non-galvanized steel, primer shall be manufacturer's standard rust-resistant metallic or phenol-resin primer. 2. For galvanized steel, primer shall be Sherwin-Williams Kem-Kromik Universal Metal Primer or equal. C. Core Filler Material: 1. Non-insulated doors - manufacturer's standard fibrous honeycomb. 2. Insulated doors - One pound density polystyrene, physical properties: R factor of 7.7, 1,750 psf compressive strength. 3. Core material shall completely fill the inside of the door and be laminated to both inside faces of the panels. 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Steelcraft of Masco Industries 2. Republic Builders Products 3. Curries of L. B. Foster Co. 4. Bymoco Metal Fabricators 5. Ceco Door Products 6. Kewanee Corporation 7. Deansteel Manufacturing Inc. 8. Amweld Inc. 9. Approved equal 2.02 FABRICATION A. Frames shall be set up, arc welded and ground smooth and shall have spreaders attached. Provide frame anchors of the proper type for adjoining construction. No less than three (3) wall anchors per jamb for frames to 7'- 4" high, four (4) anchors per jamb for frames over 7'- 4" high. Each jamb to have floor anchor. 1. Provide continuous sheet drip across head of exterior doors exposed to weather. a) Provide galvanized steel top and bottom filler cap at all exterior doors. B. Doors shall be full flush type, with seams finished so as to be invisible. 1. Close top and bottom edges of door with steel channel, minimum 16 gauge, extending full width of door, and spot welded to both faces. 2. Provide bevel on swing side. 3. Provide adequate bracing. 4. All hollow metal doors in exterior walls shall be insulated doors. 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 5. Provide metal astragal at pairs of exterior doors without mullion. C. Provide for hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware. Provide reinforcing for hardware in accordance with ANSI A115 and SDI. D. Provide UL labels on both doors and frames where indicated. Do not remove labels. E. Provide screw-on glazing stops with mitered corners. Locate stops on non-public (room) side of opening. F. Provide dust boxes or mortar guards, 26 gauge minimum. G. Finishing: 1. Thoroughly clean all contaminants from surface by washing with clean solvent and wiping with clean cloths. 2. Treat non-galvanized items with phosphate pretreatment. 3. All doors and frames shall receive a factory applied primer. 4. All concealed parts of frames to be installed in masonry walls shall be coated with bituminous paint. H. Except for labeled and exterior frames, provide drilled holes in door stop for silencers. I. Furnish galvanized steel shims as required to maintain 1/8" clearance between frame and door and between pairs of doors. J. Where indicated, provide inverted type sightproof stationary metal louvers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Anchor work securely to adjacent construction. B. Set frames accurately, plumb and square. Brace until attached to adjacent construction. 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Frames built into masonry shall be grouted full with mortar. See Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry. Provide necessary mortar boxes. D. Do not use cardboard or other unspecified material for shims. E. Install metal doors and frames in accordance with the following standards published by the Steel Door Institute: Frames, SDI 105; Hardware, SDI 107; Doors, SDI 100. 3.03 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 – WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PAGE 1 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 14 16: WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the furnishing and installation of all flush wood doors in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork B. Section 08 14 33: Stile and Rail Wood Doors C. Section 08 71 00: Finish Hardware 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS The following publications and standards are hereby incorporated by reference: A. The "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" latest edition, published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). B. Indiana Building Code, latest edition. C. ASTM E152 - Fire rated wood door assemblies. D. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Fire Doors (120 IDO) for fire classification marking. E. UBC 7-2-1997, Positive Pressure Testing for Fire Rated Doors. F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), "Standard Fire Doors and Windows", NFPA No. 80 for installation of fire rated doors. G. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA), Face Grade Wood Veneer Standards. 08 14 16 – WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PAGE 2 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall be qualified to affix each door with National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA) seal of approval or quality certification stamp. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, “Architectural Wood Flush Doors.” D. Fire-rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. E. Fire Label to indicate door meets positive pressure fire door requirements per category A with intumescent material concealed under the door edge material. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Door Schedule - indicate opening identifying symbol, sizes, door types and grades, special trim for opening, door elevations, fire classification marking, swing, light and louver cutout sizes and locations, undercuts, panel and core and edge details. B. Submit certificates of compliance with fabrication and test requirements signed by authorized representative of door manufacturing company. C. Finish samples: The Architect will provide the initial stain selection. After initial selection the supplier shall submit each accepted finish on a 12"x 12" door sample with specified veneer for Architect's final approval. D. Submit manufacturer's warranty as specified. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Package doors individually and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 08 14 16 – WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PAGE 3 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Delivery: 1. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% nor greater than 55%. 2. Factory seal all four edges of doors, prior to delivery to project site, using water- repellent preservative. E. Storage: 1. Stack flat on 2 x 4 lumber, laid 12" from ends and across center. 2. Under bottom door and over top of stack provide plywood or corrugated cardboard to protect door surface. 3. Store doors in area where there will be no great variations in heat, dryness or humidity. F. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All doors shall carry the manufacturer's standard "Life of Installation" warranty for interior doors and two years for exterior doors. B. Manufacturer’s standard form, signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than ¼ inch (6.4 mm) in a 42- by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75mm) span. C. Warranty shall also include refinishing or reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS (INTERIOR) A. Acceptable Manufacturers; subject to compliance with these specifications: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Buell Door Company 08 14 16 – WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PAGE 4 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Eggers Hardwood Products Corporation 4. Marshfield Doors Systems, Inc. 5. VT Industries 6. Approved equal prior to bidding B. Wood Doors: Solid Core, AWI Custom Grade, 5-ply construction (non-rated and 20-minuted rated) Model: AWI Type PC-5 (PC-7 not acceptable) Style: Flush Face: HPVA Grade A Veneer, Red Oak plain sawn Core: Particle board conforming to latest edition of ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, or as required for lifetime warranty Stile Edges: Matching hardwood stile edges bonded to core, 1-3/8" minimum prior to fitting Crossband: Minimum 1/16" Adhesive: Interior use, Type II - water resistant Thickness: 1-3/4" or 1-3/8" as scheduled C. Labeled Wood Fire Doors: Non-combustible Mineral Core, AWI Custom Grade, 5- ply construction. Model: AWI Types FD Style: Flush Face: HPVA Grade A Veneer, Red Oak plain sawn. Core: Non-combustible mineral or agrifiber core Stile Edges: 5/8" minimum after trimming untreated hardwood Rail Edges: Top, 1/2" minimum untreated Bottom, 1-1/2" minimum untreated Rating: As indicated on door schedule Thickness: 1-3/4" Blocking: Provide wood top rail, bottom rail and lock blocking. D. Construction: Bond stiles and rails to core, then entire unit to be abrasive planed before veneering to achieve uniform thickness. E. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer’s standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. The edges cannot contain salt treating. F. Blocking at Fire Rated Doors: Provide optional composite blocking designed to maintain fire resistance of door but with improved screw-holding capability of same 08 14 16 – WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PAGE 5 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 thickness as core. Locate blocking at all hardware points. Through bolts not accepted. G. All labeled doors to meet positive pressure fire rating. Provide Category A with intumescent material concealed under the door edge material. H. Glazing: Shall be furnished and installed by the wood door manufacturer. Provide clear safety glass at non rated doors and clear Fire rated glazing at rated doors for required rating. Install glass using manufacturer’s standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920. Secure glass in place with removable wood stops. I. Where indicated, provide matching wood stops or (veneer wrapped rolled steel) for glass lites. 1. Lite sizes shall be as indicated on drawings. J. Pairs of doors shall be set matched without metal astragal or metal meeting edge. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suite frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.03 DOOR FRAMES AND CASINGS A. Interior locations, for transparent finish: AWI Section 900. 1. AWI quality grade - Custom. 2. Solid wood – Paint grade 3. Veneer: Paint grade . 4. Frames shall be solid lumber with applied ploughed in stops – Provide mutes. 08 14 16 – WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PAGE 6 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 5. Frames to be factory primed and field painted. 2.04 PREFINISHING A. Doors shall be factory pre-finished by the door manufacturer. Factory finish for all doors shall be identical. Finish shall cover all sides, including under hinges and inside lockset bore. Panel edges are to be stained prior to assembly. Doors shall be finished according to AWI Section 1500, premium grade, System TR6 catalyzed polyurethane, partially filled pore, 55° - 75° sheen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify that door frames are of type required for doors and are installed as required for proper installation of doors. Field verify all dimensions prior to door fabrication. B. Install doors in accordance with written instructions of the manufacturer and the requirements of NWMA Standard Door Guarantee. C. On-the-job cuts in interior doors: Not permitted. D. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 recommendations. Do not remove labels. E. Fitting and Machining: 1. Fit non-rated doors for width by planing; for height by sawing. 2. Standard clearances: a) 1/8" at top. b) 1/8" at each side. c) 1/16" per leaf at pairs meeting edges. d) 1/2" from bottom to decorative floor covering. e) For doors with threshold, 1/4" from bottom of door to top of threshold. 3. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8" in 2". 4. Coordinate machining with related work specified elsewhere. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN 08 14 16 – WOOD DOORS (FLUSH) PAGE 7 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Replace or rehang doors which are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely, or are damaged. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if wok complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. 3.03 DISPOSAL A. All waste material shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 1 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 14 33: STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the furnishing and installation of all wood stile and rail doors in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Include doors, matching transom and panels. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork B. Section 08 14 16: Wood Doors (Flush) C. Section 08 71 00: Finish Hardware D. Section 08 81 00: Glass and Glazing E. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Finishing 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" latest edition, published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Section 01400 is hereby incorporated by reference. B. Indiana Building Code, latest edition. C. ASTM E152 - Fire rated wood door assemblies. D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Fire Doors (120 IDO) for fire classification marking. E. UBC 7-2-1997, Positive Pressure Testing for Fire Rated Doors. F. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA), Face Grade Wood Veneer Standards. 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 2 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall be qualified to affix each door with National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA) seal of approval or quality certification stamp. B. Source Limitations: Obtain wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.6A, “Architectural Wood Stile and Rail Doors.” D. Fire-rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. E. Fire Label to indicate door meets positive pressure fire door requirements per category A with intumescent material concealed under the door edge material. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Door Schedule - indicate opening identifying symbol, sizes, door types and grades, finishes, door elevations, fire classification marking, swing, light cutout sizes and locations, undercuts, panel and core details and edge details. B. Submit certificates of compliance with fabrication and test requirements signed by authorized representative of door manufacturing company. C. Construction Samples: Corner section with door faces, raised panels, sticking profile, edges, and core representative of the specified door type(s). Corner samples to be not less than 12” x 12”. D. Finish Samples: The Architect will provide the initial stain selection. After initial selection the supplier shall submit each accepted finish on an 8"x 10" sample for Architect's final approval. E. Submit manufacturer's warranty as specified. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer’s written instructions. 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 3 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Package doors individually and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. D. Delivery: 1. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% nor greater than 55%. 2. Factory seal all four edges of doors, prior to delivery to project site, using water- repellent preservative. E. Storage: 1. Stack flat on 2 x 4 lumber, laid 12" from ends and across center. 2. Under bottom door and over top of stack provide plywood or corrugated cardboard to protect door surface. 3. Store doors in area where there will be no great variations in heat, dryness or humidity. F. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All doors shall carry the manufacturer’s standard “Life of Installation” warranty for interior doors. B. Manufacturer’s standard form, signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than ¼ inch (6.4 mm) in a 42- by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75 mm) span. C. Warranty shall also include refinishing or reinstallation, which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 4 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with these specifications: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Hardwood Products Corporation 3. The Maiman Company – Springfield, Missouri 4. Marshfield Doors Systems, Inc. 5. VT Industries 6. Approved equal prior to bidding. 2.02 STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. Doors: 1. Hardwood stile and rail construction with floating raised panels. Joints shall be coped, glued and dowelled. Vertically aligned panels and stiles to be cut from single piece of stock, installed with natural grain continuity. Panels shall be profiled as detailed on the Drawings. Doors shall be beveled and back-beveled. 2. Prepare all doors for glass and finish hardware as required herein. 3. Provide matching wood molding for glass lights. 4. Adhesives: Waterproof - Type 1 B. Stile and rail doors shall be CustomGrade, AWI quality standards, Section 1400, 1- 3/4" thick, unless scheduled otherwise, sizes as noted on Drawings. 1. Stiles and rails to be Structural Composite Lumber Core with thick face veneer and hardwood edges of same specie as face veneer. 2. Panels: flat to be veneered profiled panels. 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 5 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Wood shall be select Red Oak plain sawn, 6% - 8% moisture content. D. Fire rated doors and frames shall as indicated in the drawings, 45 and 90min. UL listed, as scheduled on the Drawings. All labeled doors to meet positive pressure fire rating. Provide Category A with in intumescent material concealed under the door edge material. 1. Frames, hinges, locks and installation shall be in accordance with this listing. 2. Rated doors shall be custom grade per AWI Section 1400 2.03 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suite frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Glazing: Shall be furnished and installed in wood doors and frames by the wood door manufacturer. Provide clear safety glass at non rated and clear Fire rated glazing at rated for required rating. Install glass using manufacturer’s standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920. Secure glass in place with removable wood stops. D. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. E. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. 2.04 DOOR FRAMES AND CASINGS A. Interior locations, for transparent finish: AWI Section 900. 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 6 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1. AWI quality grade - Custom. 2. Solid wood – Paint grade 3. Veneer: Paint grade . 4. Frames shall be solid lumber with applied ploughed in stops – Provide mutes. 5. Frames to be factory primed and field painted. 2.05 PREFINISHING A. Doors shall be factory pre-finished by the door manufacturer. Factory finish for all doors shall be identical. Finish shall cover all sides, including under hinges and inside lockset bore. Panel edges are to be stained prior to assembly. Doors shall be finished according to AWI Section 1500, custom grade, System TR6 catalyzed polyurethane, partially filled pore, 55° - 75° sheen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify that door frames are of type required for doors and are installed as required for proper installation of doors. Field verify all dimensions prior to door fabrication. B. Install doors in accordance with written instructions of the manufacturer and the requirements of NWMA Standard Door Guarantee. C. On-the-job Cuts in Interior Doors: Not permitted. D. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA recommendations. Do not remove labels. E. Fitting and Machining: 1. Fit non-rated doors for width by planing; for height by sawing. Fire-rated doors shall not be cut in the field. 2. Standard clearances: a) 1/8" at top. b) 1/8" at each side. 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PAGE 7 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 c) 1/16" per leaf at pairs meeting edges. e) 1/2" from bottom to decorative floor covering. f) For doors with threshold, 1/4" from bottom of door to top of threshold. 3. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8" in 2". 4. Coordinate machining with related work specified elsewhere. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Replace or rehang doors which are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely, or are damaged. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if wok complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. 3.03 DISPOSAL A. All waste material shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 08 31 00 - ACCESS DOORS PAGE 1 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 31 00: ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all access door installations in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants B. Section 09 25 00: Gypsum Wallboard C. Section 09 90 00: Finish Painting D. Division Mechanical E. Division Electrical 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, technical data and product specifications. B. Submit shop drawings as noted herein for the specific item, showing door and frame sizes, types, materials, construction, finishing, anchoring and accessories. C. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. D. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions as noted herein for the specific item. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 08 31 00 - ACCESS DOORS PAGE 2 OF 2 SCEC-III/08-08 2.01 ACCESS DOORS A. All access doors for the project shall comply with these specifications. 1. Access doors in finished ceiling or wall surfaces required for access to mechanical or electrical items shall be furnished under Divisions 15 and 16 and shall meet the requirements of this section. All others shall be furnished under this Section. 2. All access doors shall be installed under the specification section covering the finish construction in which they occur. a) In drywall partitions and ceilings, Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard. B. Description: Flush type steel units, 16 gauge frames, 14 gauge doors with stiffened edges, key-operated flush lock, as manufactured by Bilco, Nystrom, Karp, J. L. Industries, Cierra or approved equal. 1. Provide access devices and frames of design compatible with construction systems in which they are installed. 2. Provide U. L. labeled access doors in rated assemblies. 3. Size of access doors shall be adequate to permit servicing of devices, or access to service shafts. Sizes as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 4. Finish: Rust-inhibitive primer coat ready for finish painting according to Section 09900 - Painting and Finishing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM FRAMING AND ENTRANCES PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 41 13: ALUMINUM FRAMING AND ENTRANCES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all aluminum framed entrances and storefronts as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants B. Section 08 51 00: Aluminum Windows C. Section 08 71 00: Finish Hardware D. Section 08 81 00: Glass and Glazing 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Aluminum Association (AA) "Designation for Aluminum Finishes". B. Indiana Building Code – Current edition 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and complete technical data on all products to be furnished under this Section, including fasteners. B. Aluminum finish samples. C. Shop drawings showing construction of all parts, metal thickness, installation and erection details, including connections, anchorage, fastening, and sealing methods, sections of typical members, dimensioned elevations, frame sizes, spacing of anchors, details of accessories. D. Manufacturer's recommended installation and maintenance procedures. E. Manufacturer's written guarantee. 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM FRAMING AND ENTRANCES PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM A. Flush-glazed thermally-broken framing at exterior. B. Flush-glazed non- thermally-broken framing at interior 1. Manufacturer: a) Kawneer b) Efco c) Tubelight d) Approved equal per 01 62 00 C. Extrusions: 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B221). D. Exposed Fasteners: Aluminum or stainless steel (ASTM B633). E. Concealed fasteners: Zinc plated steel (ASTM B633). F. Anchors: Aluminum or Stainless Steel. G. Framing shall be factory-prepared and shop-assembled for jobsite installation and sealed according to manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Framing members shall be extruded shapes with sharp, well-defined corners and flush tight seams with no unfinished metal exposed. Sections shall be designed to accommodate glass as indicated on the Contract Documents. Systems shall be designed and reinforced as necessary to fully comply with the requirements of the current edition of the Indiana Building Code. Include 0.125 thick extruded aluminum and trim with finish to match framing. Provide frame depth as required. All exterior frames shall be thermally broken. Note: Framing members will be required to be formed to a radius as shown. H. Glazing Gaskets: Elastomeric EPDM Extrusions. I. At windows type A,B and C provide and install additional removable stops for the interior stain glass. Color and finish of stops to match window frame. Installed stops to be breathable. J. Performance Requirements: 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM FRAMING AND ENTRANCES PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Air infiltration (ASTM E-283) shall not exceed .06 CFM per square foot. 2. Water infiltration (ASTM E-331) frame shall not leak at test pressure at 15 P.S.F. 3. Performance under loading (ASTM E-330) maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed 1/175 of its span, and when load is removed there shall be no evidence of permanent deformation or damage when tested under load of 40 PSF. 4. Allowable stress safety factor: 1.65 K. Finish: 1. Framing: Duranar "Kynar 500" fluorocarbon based baked-on paint finish, two-coat system. Finish color to match Pella Tan No. PR0152 at exterior of building. All frames at interior of building to be white, as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors, for window and door frames. 2.02 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS A. Wide Stile Entrance Doors. B. All materials, methods and finishes shall conform to requirements of paragraph 2.01 of this section. Doors and frames shall have 0.125" wall thickness. C. Finish: D. Doors: Duranar "Kynar 500" fluorocarbon based baked-on paint finish, two-coat system. Door 121a finish color to match Porter Paint candy apple 60426. Comply with requirements of AAMA 605. All other aluminum doors to be white, as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors, for window and door frames. E. Door Hardware Door 100b (Finish to match US 10BDark Bronze ) 1. Continuous Geared Hinge: Select Products SL 11HD. 2. Closers: LCN 4040 series parallel arm Surface Closer, with CUSH N Stop 3. Concealed overhead stop and hold: Glynn Johnson 104H 4 Provide Baldwin 2575 push/ pulls each leaf. 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM FRAMING AND ENTRANCES PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 5. Weather-stripping: Meeting rails and door frame gasket. F. Door Hardware Doors 121a (Finish to match US 10BDark Bronze ) 1. Continuous Geared Hinge: Select Products SL 11HD. 2. Closers: LCN 4040 series parallel arm Surface Closer, with CUSH N Stop 3. Concealed overhead stop and hold: Glynn Johnson 104H 4. Panic Devices: Von Duprin Series 55 NL (with 376T) & 55DT Drop bar exit device. Locate 55DT at leaf with auto-operator. Provide Baldwin 2575 pulls each leaf. 5. Auto - Operator: LCN 4642 x 120v x push side mount w/ receiver 7910-931-2 and Actuator kit 7910-952RF. Provide with wall key switch (master keyed) mounted on door frame +6’-0” above floor. 6. Keyed removable mullion: Match color of doors 7. Thresholds: Aluminum threshold, 1/2″ x 4″, handicapped accessible. 8. Weather-stripping: Bottom door sweep, meeting rails and doorframe gasket. 9. Key cylinder with removable core: For lock, Auto operator & Removable Mullion. See Section 08 71 00. G. Door Hardware Doors 121b (Finish to match US 10BDark Bronze ) 1. Continuous Geared Hinge: Select Products SL 11HD. 2. Closers: LCN 4040 series parallel arm Surface Closer, with CUSH N Stop 3. Concealed overhead stop and hold: Glynn Johnson 104H 4 Provide Baldwin 2575 push/ pulls each leaf. 5. Auto - Operator: LCN 4642 x 120v x push side mount w/ receiver 7910-931-2 and Actuator kit 7910-952RF. Provide with wall key switch (master keyed) 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM FRAMING AND ENTRANCES PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 mounted on door frame +6’-0” above floor. 6. Weather-stripping: Meeting rails and door frame gasket. 7. Key cylinder with removable core: Auto operator. See Section 08 71 00. 2.03 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Specified in Section 08 81 00. B. Glass: Type indicated on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install aluminum framing system and entrances plumb, square, and true to line and level. Installation shall be in strict compliance with the Contract Drawings, the approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all windows and entrances from misuses or damage after installation. B. Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective coverings or coatings, except permanent type lacquers, and recommendations. 3.03 GUARANTEE A. The aluminum manufacturer shall guarantee framing system and doors against failure of materials or workmanship, to include excessive leakage and air infiltration, excessive deflection, faulty operation, deterioration of finish or metal in excess of normal weathering, and defects in hardware and weatherstripping. B. Guarantee shall extend for a period of five (5) years after Substantial Completion. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 1 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 51 13: ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all extruded aluminum doors and door and window frames, including fixed glazing accommodations for insulating glazing at exterior openings with integral interior stop for art glass and single glazing at interior openings with integral interior stop for art glass. Provide frame reinforcements as required to meet required wind loading in accordance with the Contract Documents. Provide window units type E & M and door and frame for door 100a (frame F6). Units E and Frame for door 100a (frame F6) to be designed to accept 1” insulating glass and art glass. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants B. Section 08 41 13: Aluminum Framing and Entrances C. Section 08 81 00: Glass and Glazing 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA (American Architectural Manufacturers Association): B. ANSI (American National Standards Institute): C. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials): D. CPSC (Consumer Product Safety Commission): E. FGMA (Flat Glass Marketing Association): F. GSA (General Services Administration): G. Indiana Building Code – Current edition 1.04 ITEMS INSTALLED AND FURNISHED (BY OTHERS) 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 2 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Art glass 1.05 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Windows shall conform to all ANSI/AAMA 101-85 HC50 requirements. In addition, the following specific performance requirements must be met. B. Test Procedure and Performance Requirements 1. Air Infiltration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283-83, air infiltration shall not exceed 0.03 cfm/ft under a static pressure drop of 6.24 psf. 2. Water Resistance: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 331-83 and ASTM E 547-83 there shall be no water leakage when the window is subjected to a pressure drop of 7.50 psf. 3. Uniform Structural Load Test: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 330-79 with a static pressure difference of 127.5 psf exterior (positive) and 127.5 psf interior (negative) there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts or actuating mechanisms which would cause the window to be inoperable. Permanent deformation of any frame or vent member shall not exceed .2% of its span. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test reports from an independent certified laboratory shall be available upon request. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and complete technical data on all products to be furnished under this Section, including fasteners. B. Aluminum finish samples. C. Shop drawings showing construction of all parts, metal thickness, installation and erection details, including connections, anchorage, fastening, and sealing methods, sections of typical members, dimensioned elevations, frame sizes, spacing of anchors, details of accessories. D. Manufacturer's recommended installation and maintenance procedures. 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 3 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 E. Manufacturer's written guarantee. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and handle windows and other components in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Protect units against damage from the elements, construction activities and other hazards before, during, and after installation. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Submit written warranties from window manufacturer for the following: 1. Windows: Windows furnished are certified as fully warranted against any defects in material or workmanship under normal use and service for a period of five (5) years from date of Substantial Compleltion. 2. Finish: The pigmented organic finishes on windows and component parts (such as panning, trim, mullions, and the like) are certified as complying fully with the requirements of the AAMA 260X specification and fully warranted against chipping, peeling, cracking or blistering for a period of five (5) years from date of installation. Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The contract documents are based on a system as manufactured by CAFF Company, Pittsburgh, PA (412-787-1761) 1. Other acceptable manufacturers provided their product meets the specified requirements of this section and contract documents. a) J. Sussman, Inc., Jamaica, NY (718-297-0228) b) Baut Studios, Swoyersville, PA (800-326-9421). c) Substitution as approved by an Addendum B. Other manufacturers desiring approval shall: 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 4 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Furnish a sample window and valid test reports indicating full compliance with all performance requirements of this specification at least 10 days prior to bid date. 2. Have been engaged in the fabrication of aluminum windows for ten years and this type of window for 5 years and shall submit for review a list of similar completed projects. 3. Approval of "equal" products shall be in the form of a written addendum. Substitute products not pre-approved by the Architect via addenda will not be considered. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper with a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 22,000 psi. Comply with ASTM B 221 B. Thermal barriers shall consist of a poured-in-place two part chemically curing structural polyurethane. C Fasteners shall be aluminum, stainless steel or other materials warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of the window units. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General 1. All main sections shall have a minimum depth of 3 1/2" with wall thicknesses ranging from .094 to .125. 2. Glazing rebates shall not be less than 5/8" in height. 3. Interior art glass muntins shall be 1 1/8" deep with 1/8" walls. 4. The airspace between the art and protection glass shall be a minimum of 5/8" 5. The extruded window members shall form a channel separating the glass which will also act as a condensation gutter. 6. This channel shall be an integral part of the aluminum extrusion. An add on piece will not be accepted. 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 5 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 7. Either glass shall be able to be removed or installed without disturbing the glass on the opposite side. 8. All main sections shall utilize a thermal barrier to separate the exterior and interior metal surfaces 9. Thermal barriers shall be a minimum 5/16" and shall align at all frame and sash corners. . 10. No hardware or fasteners of any kind shall bridge or penetrate the thermal barrier. 11. All muntins and meeting rails shall be double tubular. 12. All joints shall be cut to a hairline fit and be either fully sigma arc welded or shall be heavy angle reinforced, cold welded with epoxy adhesive and hydraulically crimped. 13. All joints shall be factory sealed. B. Framing shall be factory-prepared and shop-assembled for jobsite installation and sealed according to manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Framing members shall be extruded shapes with sharp, well-defined corners and flush tight seams with no unfinished metal exposed. Sections shall be designed to accommodate glass as indicated on the Contract Documents. Systems shall be designed and reinforced as necessary to fully comply with the requirements of the current edition of the Indiana Building Code. Include 0.125 thick extruded aluminum and trim with finish to match framing. Provide frame depth as required. All exterior frames shall be thermally broken. Units E and Frame for door 100a (frame F6) to be designed to accept 1” insulating glass and art glass. Note: Framing members will be required to be formed to a radius as shown. C. Glazing Beads 1. Glazing beads shall be extruded from 6063-T5 alloy and be not less than .050 thick. 2. The glazing beads will be snap in type to securely interlock into the extruded window members without extending underneath the glass. 3. They shall be factory fitted and attached. 4. Glazing beads shall also be secured with stainless steel fasteners where required. 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 6 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 2.04 FINISH A. The finish of the aluminum windows shall be High performance organic finish electro statically applied over pretreated aluminum. Finish shall be based on 70% fluoropolymer resin and be applied as a two coat, two bake paint system with a 1.2 mil minimum thickness and shall conform to AAMA 2605. Exterior and interior color to be white, as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors, for window and door frames. Door color to match Porter Paint candy apple 60426. 2.05 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS A. Wide Stile Entrance Doors to match aluminum door by specifications 08 41 13. B. All materials, methods and finishes shall conform to requirements of paragraph 2.01 of this section. Doors and frames shall have 0.125" wall thickness. C. Door Hardware Doors 100a (Finish to match US 10BDark Bronze ) 1. Continuous Geared Hinge: Select Products SL 11HD. 2. Closers: LCN 4040 series parallel arm Surface Closer, with CUSH N Stop 3. Concealed overhead stop and hold: Glynn Johnson 104H 4. Panic Devices: Von Duprin Series 55 NL (with 376T) & 55DT Drop bar exit device. Provide Baldwin 2575 pulls each leaf. 5. Keyed removable mullion: Match color of doors 6. Thresholds: Aluminum threshold, 1/2″ x 4″, handicapped accessible. 7. Weather-stripping: Bottom door sweep, meeting rails and doorframe gasket. 8. Key cylinder with removable core: For lock and Removable Mullion. See Section 08 71 00. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that openings are dimensionally correct and within allowable tolerances. 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 7 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Openings must be plumb, level, and clean. C. Provide a solid anchoring surface that is in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use only skilled craftsmen for work to be done in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and/or approved shop drawings and specifications. B. Windows and door frames materials must be set square and level. C. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. D. Adjust Doors for proper operation after installation has been completed. E. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersections and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. After completion of window and door installation, all windows and doors shall be inspected, adjusted, and left in working order. B. Windows and doors shall be cleaned to remove mortar, plaster, paint or other contaminants. C. After cleaning, all work shall be protected against damage until it is accepted by the Owner. D. Send to Architect, with copy to Owner, written recommendations for maintenance and protection of windows and doors following Substantial Completion. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 8 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 08 52 13 - ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS & DOORS PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 52 13: ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS & DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all aluminum clad wood windows and doors and related accessories, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry B. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork C. Section 07 62 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal D. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication, indicating construction and installation details, materials, sizes and finishes. Field verify opening dimensions prior to shop fabrication. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site as and when directed by the General Contractor. If site storage is necessary, store materials in an area protected from weather. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA) 605.2 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coating. B. National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA) I.S.-2 -93, 3-95 Industry Standard for Wood Windows. 08 52 13 - ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS & DOORS PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Window units shall meet F-HC40 specifications in accordance with NWWDA I.S.-2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WINDOW & DOOR TYPES A. Factory assembled aluminum clad wood fixed and operating units, factory assembled aluminum clad wood units with factory standard, inside glazed, 5/8″ Insulshield glazing argon-filled, multi layer low –E coated dual-seal insulating glass. See Drawings for configurations. B. The basis for this specification is Pella Clad Designer Series Frames. Other listed manufacturers shall provide equal products with all required features. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Pella Corp. of Pella, Iowa B. Marvin Window Co., Warroad, Minnesota C. Equal as approved under the provisions of Section 01 62 00 2.03 MATERIALS A. Frames shall be water repellent preservative treated Western Pine or Douglas Fir. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Components shall be assembled with screws and concealed corner locks. Frame shall be furnished with stops for glazing from the interior. B. Provide trim and accessories as required to include perimeter fin and head drip C. Provide applied exterior muntins to match existing on Phase 1 & 2 by creative millwork. Color to match window frame. 2.05 DOORS A. Doors shall be Pella Architect Series out swinging aluminum clad wood French Doors, with, 5/8” tempered Insulshield glazing, threshold, weather-stripping, four non 08 52 13 - ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS & DOORS PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 removable pin hinges, mortised and keyed three-point locking system with center deadbolt and shoot-bolts at head and sill to engage simultaneously. Provide lever handles and key lock. Cylinders to be provided under spec 08 71 00. Provide closers with stop and hold open. Hardware finish to be US10B oil rubbed bronze. 2.06 FINISH A. The interior shall be factory primed. The exterior aluminum finish shall be Pella Endura Clad Exterior Finish System, a fluorocarbon in a color to match Pella PR0152 Tan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All units to be carefully installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Sill and head shall be level, jambs plumb and blocked. Verify squareness of unit before final anchoring in wall. Check installation and operation of unit before application of interior trim. B. Place insulation in shim space around perimeter. C. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion. 3.02 SEALANT A. The perimeter joint between the unit frame and adjacent construction shall be finished with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect all units from damage after installation until the completion of the project. B. Clean frames and glass at Substantial Completion. 3.04 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year warranty on glazing, ten (10) year warranty on window with two (2) year parts and labor at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08 71 00 - FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 1 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 71 00: FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all finish hardware in accordance with the Contract Documents, except as otherwise noted. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork B. Section 08 11 13: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames C. Section 08 14 16: Wood Doors (Flush) D. Section 08 14 33: Stile and Rail Wood Doors E. Section 08 41 13: Aluminum Framing and Entrances 1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Furnish cylinders to Sections 08 41 13 for installation. B. Templates: Hardware applied to metal doors and frames shall be of types shown but made to template. Required templates shall be made available to door and/or frame manufacturer not later than ten (10) days after acceptance of the hardware schedule. 1.04 SITE INSPECTION The following publications are hereby incorporated by reference except as modified by Product Specifications: A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, July 26, 1991. B. ANSI/NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows. C. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. D. SDI – Steel Door Institute. E. BHMA – Builder’s Hardware Manufacturer’s Association. 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 2 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 F. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute. G. Indiana Building Code, 2003 Edition. H. UL – Underwriters Laboratories. I. ANSI A115 and A156. Material and application standards, current edition. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in the supply of door hardware with three (3) years’ experience and with an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) in its employ to properly handle, detail and service hardware in a satisfactory manner. The AHC shall be identified on the hardware submittal. B. Manufacturer: Companies specializing door hardware with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 current edition. 2. Provide hardware tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing agency. 3. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings conforming to UL10C positive pressure fire testing. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a complete typewritten hardware schedule showing door types and sizes, hardware manufacturer’s name and catalog numbers, finish symbols, sizes and quantities, vandal-resistant fasteners and accessories. 1. Prepare a Contractor’s Hardware Schedule based on the schedule of hardware requirements included in this Specification. Include all hardware items for each opening as appropriate and as required for a complete functional installation, whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not. 2. Contractor’s Hardware Schedule shall be accompanied by three sets of catalog data covering each item of hardware included in the schedule. 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 3 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Electrified Hardware: 1. Furnish wiring diagrams for scheduled items requiring power. 2. Furnish for each door an elevation showing location of electric hardware; include point to point wiring and riser diagrams and power requirements. Verify compatibility of all components. 3. Provide operational description. NOTE: Schedules submitted without the above requirements of D1, D2, D3 will be considered incomplete and will not be reviewed. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this section with other directly affected sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Coordinate installation with finishing operations. C. Provide at the appropriate time hardware templates and hardware samples as required for metal doors and frames, wood doors and other related work. D. Review scheduled hardware for installation conflicts. Notify Architect and resolve conflicts prior to fabrication or installation. 1.09 PACKING AND LABELING A. Deliver hardware in the manufacturer’s original packages, properly marked or labeled in accordance with the approved Hardware Schedule. Each change-key shall be identified with the door for which its cylinder is intended. Provide necessary templates and instructions. 1.10 KEYING A. New locksets shall incorporate a security system to assure that keys used during construction will not open doors after occupancy. B. All new locks shall be keyed alike in groups, and master keyed, in accordance with the Keying Schedule prepared by the finish hardware supplier and approved by the Architect. 1. Hardware supplier shall consult with the Architect and Owner to determine the keying requirements prior to preparing the Keying Schedule. 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 4 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Hardware supplier shall submit the Keying Schedule to the Architect for review prior to delivery of locksets. C. All new locks installed shall be keyed into the building existing YALE master-keyed locking system. Locksets shall be provided with seven (7) pin removable key cores. D. The hardware supplier shall furnish all construction cores and all permanent lock cores required for the project. E. Upon completion of the Work, the hardware supplier shall tag and deliver all keys to the Owner. Provide two (2) keys for each lock and four (4) for each master or grandmaster key. 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance related to preventative maintenance, per Section 01 77 00. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Locks and Latches: 1. Best Lock Corporation 2. Sargent 3. Corbin Russwin 4. Schlage Lock Company 5. Yale B. Door Closers: 1. LCN Closers 2. Corbin Russwin 3. Yale 4. Sargent 5. Dorma 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 5 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Butts, Hinges and Pivots: 1. Stanley Hardware Division/Stanley Works 2. Bommer Industries 3. Hager Hinge Company 4. McKinney Manufacturing Company 5. Lawrence Brothers 6. Rixon D. Exit Devices: 1. Von Duprin 2. Yale 3. Sargent 4. H.T. Monarch 5. Precision 6. American Device 7. Corbin Russwin E. Door Stops and Holders: 1. Glynn-Johnson Corporation 2. Ives Division/Leight Products, Inc. 3. Sargent 4. Corbin Russwin 5. Hager F. Kick Plates, Door Pulls, Push Plates and Bars: 1. Hiawatha, Inc. 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 6 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Brookline Industries, Inc. 3. Ives Corporation 4. Baldwin Hardware Manufacturing Corporation 5. Quality 6. Hager 7. Trimco G. Thresholds Weather-stripping and Smoke Gaskets 1. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 2. Zero Weather-stripping, Inc. 3. Pemko Manufacturing Company 4. National Guard 5. Hager H. Other Materials: As indicated 2.02 GENERAL OUTLINE OF HARDWARE PRODUCTS. A. Hinges and Pivots: 1. Hinges: Full mortise template hinges, five (5) knuckle type, ANSI A156.1 and A156.7. a) All hinges shall have non-rising pins; all exterior doors shall have non- removable pins. Provide standard swagging. b) Use plain bearing hinges, except use ball bearing on all exterior and vestibule doors and all doors with closers. c) Provide standard weight, except provide heavy weight on all main entrance doors. d) Provide matching screws suitable for installation. e) Hinges shall be steel except provide brass or stainless steel at all exterior doors. f) Quantity of hinges per doors: 1) Doors up to 90″ high - three (3) butts. 2) Doors up to 90″ to 120″ high - four (4) butts. 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 7 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 g) Size of hinges (1-3/4″ doors): 1) Up to 35″ wide - 4-1/2″ x 4-1/2″. 2) Over 36″ to 40″ wide - 5″ x 4-1/2″. 3) Over 40″ wide - 5″ x 4-1/2″. 4) Adjust width of hinge to clear adjacent door trim. 5) Adjust width of hinge for different door thicknesses. h) Grade of hinge from ANSI Standard A156.1 Section A: 1) Exterior Doors to 36″: A2112 standard weight hinge, A2111 heavy weight. 2) Exterior doors over 36″: A2111 heavy weight. 3) Interior doors, plain bearing: A8133 standard weight hinge, A8111 heavy weight. 4) Interior doors with closers: A8112 standard weight, A8111 heavy weight. 5) Wet area doors: A2112 standard weight hinge, A2111 heavy weight. B. Locksets: 1. General a) Locksets shall conform to ANSI A156.13 and fit ANSI A115 door preparation. b) Levers shall conform to ANSI A117.1. c) Provide UL listed locksets at fire rated doors. d) Function of lockset shall be as indicated on the hardware schedule. e) Provide sufficient strike lip with a curve to protect door trim. Provide strike boxes. f) Provide tactile or knurled knobs or levers for identification of hazardous areas. g) Locksets shall be provided with seven (7) pin removable key core. 2. Yale 5400 Series Cylindrical Locksets a) Lever and rose to be PB design. b) Locksets to conform to ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1. 3. Equal Products by: a) Best 9K Lever Sets. b) Russwin/Corbin CL 3600 Lever sets. c) Sargent 10 Line Lever sets. d Schlage D Series - C. Exit Devices: 1. General 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 8 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 a) Exit devices shall conform to ANSI A156.3, Grade 1. b) All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic exit hardware. c) All exit devices used in fire rated openings shall be UL listed for fire exit hardware. d) Provide key cylinder to match building hardware locksets. e) Provide cylinder-dogging function on non-rated doors. f) Provide matching dummy devices(s) at interior non-latching vestibule doors, with trim. g) Function of device shall be indicated on the hardware submittal. h) Non-fire rated vertical rod devices shall be LBR (less bottom rod). 2. Exit devices shall be Von Duprin Series 88 crossbar Exit Devices. a) Provide rim devices for single doors or pairs with mullion between. b) Provide pair of vertical rod devices for double doors without mullion between. c) Trim shall be lever design with escutcheon to match cylindrical lockset lever and escutcheon. d) Provide a fluid dampener in touchbar to reduce noise. e) Where necessary provide kit to provide clearance for raised glass trim. D. Removable Mullion: Von Duprin, Keyed, weatherstripped and compatible with exit devices. E. Door Closers 1. Surface mounted closers - General. a) All exterior doors shall have closers. b) All labeled doors shall have UL listed closers. c) Closers to conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. d) Closers shall be corrosion resistant. e) Use Standard Mounting on the room side for all interior doors opening into rooms or from stairwells. f) Use Parallel Arm Mounting on the room side for all interior doors opening into corridors or from stairwells. g) Provide necessary accessories and brackets to adapt to the job conditions. h) Indicate closer function on hardware submittal. i) Provide opening angle suitable for situation. 2. Surface mounted closers shall be LCN 4000 Series. a) Size Closers for doors. b) Provide full cover with plated finish. c) Provide 50% adjustable spring power. 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 9 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 d) Provide adjustable back check. e) Provide adjustable seep and latch speeds. 3. Equal products by: a) Dorma 8900 Series. b) Yale 400 Series. c) Sargent 350 Series. d) Corbin-Russwin DC 2000 Series. e) Corbin-Russwin DC 3200. 4. At handicapped accessible openings provide delayed action closers with adjustable back check cushioning and low force, per ANSI A117.1. 5. Where scheduled, provide closer with cushioned stop. 6. Where scheduled, provide closer with hold-open and cushioned stop. F. Stops and Holders: 1. Wall Stop: Ives WS401CVX Convex. 2. Wall Stop: Ives WS401CCV Concave 3. Overhead Surface Mounted Stop and Holder: Glynn Johnson 450H. G. Pulls and Plates: 1. Door Pulls: Baldwin #2575 with #2124 Plate 4 x16 2. Door Pushplates: Baldwin #2124 4x16 H. Thresholds and Weather-stripping/Smoke Gasket: 1. Threshold: National Guard #425 with 101 V door bottom 2. Door Head, Mullion, and Jamb Weather-stripping/Smoke Gasket: National Guard #5050 3. Door Bottoms: National Guard #220N 4. Drip Cap: National Guard # 16A 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 10 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 I. Miscellaneous Hardware: 1. Surface bolts: 1 pair surface manual surface bolts, strike plate and dustproof strike 2. Flushbolts: 1 pair manual flush bolts, strike plate and dustproof strike 3. Flushbolts: 1 pair automatic flush bolts, strike plate and dustproof strike ( provide Ives bar coordinator and filler bar as required) 4. Bifold doors: 1 set of Hagger 9870 series with pulls. J. Electric Hold open Magnet Device: 1. Magnet Hold: LCN SEM 7850 series Recessed Wall mount (Tie into fire alarm system) 2.03 INDEX OF HARDWARE ITEMS: A. Hinges 100 101 Hinges per 2.02A1 B. Locksets 200 201 Lockset per 2.02 B x F76 Privacy 202 Lockset per 2.02 B x F84 Classroom 203 Lockset per 2.02 B x F81 Entrance 204 Lockset per 2.02 B x F86 Storeroom C. Exit Devices 300 301 Exit device per 2.02 C1& C2 302 Keyed removable mullion per 2.02 D D. Closers 400 401 Closer per 2.02 E 402 Closer per 2.02 E with Adjustable Hold-Open and Cushioned Stop 403 Closer per 2.02 E with cushioned stop E. Stop 500 501 Wall Stop per 2.02F1 502 Wall Stop per 2.02F2 503 Overhead stop per 2.02F3 F. Push/Pull and Plates 600 601 Door Pull Per 2.02G1 602 Push Plate Per 2.02G2 603 Push supplied by the Owner 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 11 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 G. Weatherstripping 700 701 Weather-stripping/ Smoke gasket per 2.02 H2 702 Door bottom per 2.02 H3 703 Threshold per 2.02 H1 (clear anodize finish) 704 Drip Cap per 2.02 H4 H. Miscellaneous 800 801 Flushbolts, inactive leaf per 2.02 I1 802 Flushbolts, inactive leaf per 2.02 I2 803 Automatic-Flushbolts, inactive leaf per 2.02 I3 804 Magnet Hold open per 2.02 J 2.04 FINISHES A. Supply hardware items in finishes to match US10B Oil Rubbed Bronze unless otherwise noted. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Screw-thread adhesive sealant: Loctite No. 271, or approved equal, to be utilized at all hardware location. B. Key cabinet: Sized to accommodate 300% of keys provided. Install where directed by Architect. C. Provide Recessed Knox Box. Install where directed by Architect. D. Provide rubber silencers on all non-rated hollow metal and wood frames. E. Provide positive pressure seals at all rated wood doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that correct power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 12 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Install in accordance with requirements of SDI. C. Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for the disabled. D. Fittings: Fit hardware accurately and properly. Remove exposed parts until after painter's finishing is completed, then reinstall. Securely fasten fixed parts. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush. Make sure operation parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking or excessive clearance. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. After installation, clean metal surfaces on both interior and exterior of all mortar, plaster, paint and other contaminants. After cleaning, protect work against damage. 3.04 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. Whenever hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in each space or area. B. At the completion of the project, manufacturers’ suppliers or representatives shall inspect their hardware and make any final adjustments. If corrections are required due to errors or improper installation, the Architect shall be notified in writing. C. Submit certification by AHC that items specified have been properly installed and are functioning properly. 3.05 POST-COMPLETION ADJUSTMENTS A. When directed by the Architect, within two (2) years after final completion and acceptance, this Contractor shall re-adjust and refit doors and hardware, or replace defective hardware, and leave all such items in satisfactory working order. 3.06 WARRANTY A. Provide hardware manufacturer’s two (2) year written warranty for material for all installed door hardware, including electrical hardware. Door closers shall have a 08 71 00 – FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 13 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 10-year repair or replacement warranty. 3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The Hardware Schedule begins on the following page. The item numbers listed are as described in Paragraph 2.03 – Index of Hardware Items. END OF SECTION 08 71 00 - FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 14 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE (Basement & First floor) DOOR NO. 100 HINGES 200 LOCKSETS 300 EXIT DEVICES 400 CLOSERS 500 STOPS 600 PULLS/ PLATES 700 WEATHER- STRIPPING 800 MISC. 001 101 204 401 503 701,702,703,704 802 FIRST FLOOR 100a KEY CYLINDERS SEE SPEC 08 51 13 100b KEY CYLINDERS SEE SPEC 08 41 13 101 101 202 503 103 101 301 401 804 104a 101 202 501 104b 101 203 403 701,702,703,704 106 101 202 403 701,702,703,704 107a 101 402 602/603 107b KEY CYLINDERS SEE SPEC 08 52 13 109a 101 402 602/603 109b 101 402 602/603 109c 101 402 602/603 110 101 301 403 701,702,703,704 112a 101 202 501 112b 101 202 503 08 71 00 - FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 15 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE (First Floor) DOOR NO. 100 HINGES 200 LOCKSETS 300 EXIT DEVICES 400 CLOSERS 500 STOPS 600 PULLS/ PLATES 700 WEATHER- STRIPPING 800 MISC. 115a 101 202 501 115b 101 203 403 701,702,703,704 116 101 204 501 117 101 202 502 118 101 301 403 701,702,703,704 119a 101 202 503 119b 101 202 503 120 101 202 503 121a KEY CYLINDERS SEE SPEC 08 41 13 121b KEY CYLINDERS SEE SPEC 08 41 13 122 101 204 401 503 701 123 101 204 501 124 101 301 402 501 805 125 101 202 401 501 PROVIDE RECESSED KNOX BOX 08 71 00 - FINISH HARDWARE PAGE 16 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE (Second Floor) DOOR NO. 100 HINGES 200 LOCKSETS 300 EXIT DEVICES 400 CLOSERS 500 STOPS 600 PULLS/ PLATES 700 WEATHER- STRIPPING 800 MISC. 200a 101 202 501 201a 101 402 602/603 201b 101 Frame 201c 101 Frame 203 101 301 401 804 203c 101 301 501 204 101 202 402 501 205 101 301 402 603 205b 101 202 501 206 101 301 402 501 207 101 201 501 208 101 204 401 501 209a 101 202 402 501 209b 101 202 402 501 210 101 204 401 501 211 101 301 402 501 213 101 202 501 END OF SECTION 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING PAGE 1 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 81 00: GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all glass and glazing in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 61 00: Finish Carpentry B. Section 08 11 13: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames C. Section 08 14 16: Wood Doors (Flush) D. Section 08 41 13: Aluminum Framing and Entrances E. Section 08 52 13: Aluminum Clad Wood Windows 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) or Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI), as appropriate. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING PAGE 2 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Provide a layout plan indicating glass types, actual dimensions and type of installation intended for use in each opening. B. Product Data: 1. Two sets of manufacturers' product information and installation instructions for each product to be used. 2. Written certification that all products conform to these specifications. C. Samples: 1. Two 12" x 12" panels of each type, and thickness of glass. 2. Provide with manufacturer's permanent trademark and product label, which will appear on materials shipped to the site. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent recommendations or requirements of the following: 1. Flat Glass Marketing Association: a) "Glazing Manual" b) "Glazing Sealing Systems Manual" 2. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA): "Recommended Practices for Vertical Field Glazing". 3. Laminators Safety Glass Association: "Standards Manual" 4. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Standards For Glazing Materials 5. ASTM 1036: Annealed glass for use in laminates and/or further processing. 6. ASTM C1048: Heat strengthened and fully tempered glass. 7. Federal Specification TT-S-01543A1 Type II: Exterior Window Sealants. 8. ASTM E-773 and E-774: Insulating Units. 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING PAGE 3 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 9. Indiana Building Code (IBC) current edition 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Ship all glass and glazing materials to project site in original packaging, seals unbroken. B. Ship all lights of glass to site bearing manufacturer's trademark and product label. C. Store glass and glazing under conditions which protect the materials from breakage, scratching or other damage. D. Store materials on blocking at a lean of 5 - 7 degrees off vertical, or as recommended by manufacturer, against broad and sturdy uprights capable of supporting material load. E. Maintain protective conditions at all times. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty on Laminated Glass: 1. Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of laminated glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacturer, freight allowed to project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those laminated glass units which develop manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as edge separation or delamination, which materially obstructs vision through glass. 2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass: 1. Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacturer, freight allowed to project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as failure of hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance; provided the manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protection and maintaining units have been complied with during the warranty period. 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING PAGE 4 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Tempered glass (FT) shall be subject to a statistical heat-soak regimen. Samples from each lot or batch of tempered glass shall be subjected to heat soaking in sufficient quantity to ensure 95% probability that breakage of installed glass due to nickel sulfide inclusions will not exceed 0.1%. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS TYPES A. Float Glass: All float glass shall conform to ASTM C-1036, Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select). B. Heat Treated Float Glass: All heat-treated float glass shall conform to ASTM C- 1048, Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select). Such glass shall be Fully Tempered (FT) Type 1, or Heat Strengthened (HS) Type 1 as scheduled. C. Laminated Glass: All laminated shall conform to ASTM C-1172, Type LC with polyvinyl butyral sheet interlayer free of foreign material or air or gas pockets. D. Insulating Glass: All insulating glass shall be preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E-774 for Class CBA units. Glass types, thickness, and overall thickness as scheduled. Sealing system and construction per manufacturer’s standard unless scheduled otherwise. E. Provide coatings on glass where scheduled, on the surface indicated. 2.02 GLASS SCHEDULE - See Drawings for locations A. TYPE G-1: Insulating Glass, low emissivity (Low-E) coated, [VE-1-85] as manufactured by Viracon or approved equal, conforming to the following: Outer lite: 1/4″ clear Fully Tempered with Low-E coating VE-85 on #2 surface Air space: 1/2″ Inner lite: 1/4″ clear Fully Tempered Total thickness: 1″ Visible light 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING PAGE 5 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 transmittance: 76% Shading coefficient: .70 Winter U-value of .31 BTU/hr/sf(°F) Summer U-value of .33 BTU/hr/sf(°F) B. TYPE G-2: Insulating Glass, low emissivity (Low-E) coated, [VE-1-85] as manufactured by Viracon or approved equal, conforming to the following: 1” thick insulated spandrel glass: Outer lite: 1/4″ clear HS with Low-E coating VE-85 on #2 surface Air space: 1/2″ Inner lite: 1/4″ clear HS with ceramic frit #4 Total thickness: 1″ C. TYPE G3: Clear safety glazing, laminated Type LC or fully tempered FT, 1/4″ thick. D. TYPE G4: Clear float glass, 1/4″ thick. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Materials for all glazing installation shall have proven compatibility with adjacent materials and shall be as manufactured by Tremco or equal materials by Dow or General Electric as follows: 1. Setting blocks - Neoprene or EDPM, 85 +5 Shore A durometer hardness, 1/4" x 6". 2. Spacers - Neoprene or EDPM, 65 + Shore A durometer hardness, 3" lengths. 3. Glazing Tape - Tapered pre-shimmed Tremco 440, of size to provide adequate shimming, AAMA 804.1. 4. Fillers - Tremco CCN Sponge closed cell neoprene sponge. ASTM D1056. 5. Sealants - Color as selected from manufacturer's standard color range. Materials as follows: a) Heel or toe beads: Tremco Mono. b) Cap Beads: Tremco Proglaze, high modulus silicone sealant. 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING PAGE 6 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 6. Primers - As recommended by glazing material manufacturer. B. Additional products as required for a complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Inspection: Check that glazing channels are free of burrs, irregularities, and debris. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory. B. Field measure size of frame to receive glass and compute actual glass size, allowing for edging clearances. C. Preparation of Surfaces: Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed. Clean glass and glazing surfaces to remove dust, oil and contaminants and wipe dry. 1. Glazing rabbets shall be clean, dry and free of any materials that might adversely affect the bond and seal of the glazing materials or the proper drainage of the rabbet. 2. Setting blocks shall be the full width of the rabbet and placed at glass quarter points. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All glazing shall be installed as detailed on the Contract Drawings and in conformance with the FGMA Glazing Manual. Insulating glass installation shall comply with SIGMA 70-7-1 "Glazing Recommendations." B. A 1/8" minimum clearance shall be maintained between glass and sash on both faces of glass. C. Interior Windows and Doors: After the first stop has been applied to the frame, glazing lights shall be installed with setting blocks at quarter points. A minimum of 1/8" gap shall be maintained between the perimeter of the light and the frame. A bead of butyl sealant between the edge of the glass light and the frame shall be applied continuously around the perimeter of each light before the second stop is applied. No sealant should be applied to the faces of the glass. D. Exterior Windows: 08 81 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING PAGE 7 OF 7 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Airtight and watertight glazing installation of each opening will be required. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, expansion and contraction of materials and wind loading without failure of glass (within normal design parameters), sealants or other components of the installation. 2. In exterior windows or installation in locations subject to high moisture conditions, glazing shall be designed to drain off all water in the channel. Do not fill channel with sealant. Provide for drainage to weep holes. 3. On exterior sides of windows, hold materials 3/16" below stop and apply a 3/16" x 1/4" bead of specified sealant. 4. Force sealant beads into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 5. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass, stops and frames promptly after installation to eliminate stains and discolorations. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass. Remove labels from glass surface as soon as installed. B. Wash and polish both faces of glass. C. Replace damaged glass. D. Protect completed installation from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 08 90 00 - LOUVERS PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 08 90 00: LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all exterior metal louver work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 3: Concrete B. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry C. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA Standard 500. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and complete technical data on all products to be furnished under this section. B. Submit shop drawings, layouts, construction details, mounting details, and color charts for all products included under this section. C. Submit two 3" x 5" samples of the selected finish color on aluminum sheet for approval prior to finishing. D. Submit twenty (20) year warranty on Kynar 500 Louver finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Construction Specialties, Inc., Cranford, New Jersey 07016 08 90 00 - LOUVERS PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 B. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc., Maumee, Ohio 43537 C. Industrial Louvers, Inc., Delano, Minnesota 55328 D. American Abrasive Metals Co., Irvington, New Jersey 07111 E. Reliable Metal Products, Geneva, Alabama 36340 F. All-Lite Co., Airstream, or Dowco Corp. G. Airline Products Co., The Airolite Company, Ruskin Manufacturing. 2.02 FIXED LOUVERS A. Louvers shall be high performance fixed drainable aluminum louvers nominally 4" deep, Model 4097 as manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc., or approved equal by one of the approved manufacturers; sizes as shown on the drawings. 1. Louver shall provide minimum 50% free area, no water infiltration at 700 f.p.m. per AMCA certified ratings. 2. Frame and blades shall be 6063T5 alloy 0.081" thick (12 gauge). Blades shall be one-piece extrusions with gutters designed to catch and direct water to jamb and mullion drains, which shall be designed to direct water away from the inside of the louver. 3. Assembly shall be by welding, or by aluminum or stainless steel fasteners. 4. Jambs, heads and sills shall be one-piece members with integral caulking slot and retaining bead. Sill extensions as shown on the drawings shall be of the same material, gauge, and finish as the louver. Mullions shall be manufacturer's standard. 5. All louvers shall be provided with framed 1/2" mesh removable mill finish aluminum bird screens. 6. Structural supports and anchorages shall be designed and furnished by the louver manufacturer to resist a wind load of 30 psf. 7. Louvers shall be finished with Kynar 500 or approved equal three-coat system consisting of a baked-on primer and two fluorocarbon polymeric finish coats. Provide for a maximum of three (3) custom colors, as selected by the Architect. 08 90 00 - LOUVERS PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION (GENERAL) A. Install all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the approved shop drawings and the Construction Documents. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 1 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 21 16: GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all gypsum wallboard [and veneer plaster] work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Work includes all light gauge framing related to gypsum wallboard. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry B. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry C. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork D. Section 08 11 00: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames E. Section 08 41 13: Aluminum Framing and Entrances F. Section 08 52 13: Aluminum Clad Wood Windows G. Section 09 24 13: Cement Lathing and Plastering (Stucco) H. Section 09 30 13: Ceramic Tile I. Section 09 51 00: Acoustical Ceiling Systems J. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Finishing 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00100 - Instruction to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 2 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 A. ASA A97.1 - Standard Specification for the Application and Finishing of Wallboard. B. "Design Manual", Current Edition, Gypsum Association C. Indiana Building Code, Current Edition. D. Tile Council of America Handbook, Current Edition. E. ASTM C1396, C36, C79, C630, C442. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specification requirements. B. Submit manufacturer's complete product literature and printed instructions for installation of the assemblies. C. Shop drawings showing all expansion joints, control joints, typical details and accessories. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: 1. Deliver materials to project site in their original unopened containers or bundles, with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 2. Handle materials with care to prevent damage. B. Storage: 1. Store materials inside under cover. Stack flat, off floor. 2. Stack wallboard so that long lengths are not over short lengths. 3. Avoid overloading floor system. 4. Store adhesives in dry area. Provide protection against freezing at all times. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 3 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Temperature: In areas receiving wallboard installation during cold weather, maintain temperature range between 55 degrees F. to 70 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during and after gypsum wallboard, joint treatment and veneer plaster application. B. Ventilation: Provide ventilation during and following adhesives and joint treatment applications. 1. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation. 2. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint treatment. 3. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather. C. Protect adjacent surfaces against damage and stains from gypsum drywall operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Light Gauge Steel Framing 1. Standard Metal Studs and Runners: [25 gauge,] [22 gauge,] [20 gauge,] channel-type, non-load bearing galvanized steel components designed for screw attachment of gypsum wallboard complying with ASTM A525 and C645. Widths shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Utilize C-H metal shaft wall studs as per the Contract Drawings. Provide the following gauge studs for the scheduled height limitations as follows: a) 25 gauge: Up to [12' - 0"] high (interior only) b) 22 gauge: Up to [14' - 0"] high (interior only) c) 20 gauge: Up to [15' - 6"] high (interior only) d) Studs in exterior walls shall be [18][20] gauge minimum, or heavier where shown on the Drawings. e) In areas with veneer plaster deflection shall be limited to L/360. 2. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2" cold-rolled steel channels, 16 gauge, painted. Provide cold-rolled channel horizontal bracing for partitions at 4'- 0" o.c. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 4 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Furring Channels: 20 gauge, roll-formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped or "z" furring channels for screw attachment of gypsum wallboard, complying with ASTM C645. USG metal furring (20-gauge) channel or approved equal by Domtar, Incor, Gold Bond or Georgia Pacific. 4. Resilient Channels 25 gauge minimum roll-formed galvanized steel channels for use in sound-rated assemblies. 5. Deflection tracks. 6. Approved manufacturers: a) Unimast b) Dale/Incor c) Gold Bond d) Consolidated Systems e) Dietrich Industries, Inc. f) The Steel Network Inc. g) Approved equal B. Hanger Wire: Minimum 9 gauge galvanized steel wire, complying with FS QQ-W- 461. C. Gypsum Wallboard: 5/8" thickness, unless otherwise noted; Type X at rated drywall partitions. Except as noted, wallboard shall have eased, tapered edges. 1. Approved manufacturers: a) U.S. Gypsum b) Domtar c) Gold Bond d) Georgia - Pacific e) BPB America, Inc. 2. Regular board - ASTM C36. 3. Water-resistant board - ASTM C630. 4. Fire-rated board - ASTM C36, Type "X" and Fire Code "C". 5. Gypsum veneer plaster base, Fire Code C - ASTM C588 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 5 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 6. Cementitious Tile Backer Board: Portland cement board with glass fiber mesh on all surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9. a) Approved Products 1) Wonder Board - Glasscrete, Inc. 2) Durock, U. S. Gypsum 3) Equal products approved by the architect by Domtar, Gold Bond, or Georgia Pacific. 7. Gypsum Sheathing: 5/8 fiberglass reinforced fire rated sheathing, Type "X" - ASTM C1177, Georgia Pacific Dens - Glass Gold Fireguard or USG Weatherrock Type X or equal. D. Metal Accessories 1. Accessories for gypsum wallboard: a) Corner Bead - USG Dur-A-Bead, No. 103 b) Edge Trim - USG No. 200-A c) Control Joint - USG Control Joint No. 093 d) Expansion Joint - USG No. 093 3. Approved Manufacturers: a) Products approved as equal to those specified above by U.S. Gypsum may be by Dale/Incor or Gold Bond. E. Joint Treatment Materials: 1. Joints in gypsum wallboard a) Joint tape - Perforated tape, ASTM C475-89 or FS SS-J-570, Type II. b) Joint compound - Ready-mixed or powdered joint compounds, ASTM C475-89 or FS SS-J-570, Type I. 2. Joints in gypsum veneer plaster base a) Joint Tape - Paper tape at metal studs or metal furring, glass fiber open- weave tape at wood studs and wood furring. b) Joint Compound - use the veneer plaster being used. NOTE: Do not allow to dry before veneer plaster application. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 6 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 F. Screws and Attachments: Comply with the gypsum wallboard manufacturer's recommendations for each type of wall construction, with testing requirements for required fire ratings and sound ratings, and ASTM C1002-88. G. Sealants: 1. Concealed locations – non-drying, non hardening , non skinning type like USG Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant or approved equal by Tremco, Pecora, Dow Corning or Sonneborn. Use only in unexposed locations. Cannot be painted. 2. Exposed locations – Nonoxidizing skinning type one-part acrylic polymeric sealant. H. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C 665, fiberglass sound attenuation batts, thickness as required by wall assembly; 3" minimum in walls with 3-5/8" steel studs. K. Laminating Adhesives: As recommended by the manufacturer for laminating wallboard to masonry, wallboard to wallboard; cementitious tile backer board to masonry and concrete. L. Primer: Sheetrock First Coat by U.S. Gypsum - a flat latex basecoat paint formulated to provide a prime coat over interior gypsum board. Apply with brush, roller, or spray per Manufacturer’s recommendations. This product is to be used at Level 3 and 4 finishes M. Skim Coat: Sheetrock Brand Primer Surfacer-Tuff-Hide by U.S. Gypsum Apply by spray only (no backrolling) for a smooth finish per Manufacturer’s recommendations. Product to be sprayed left to right to scratch in the initial coat and then cross hatch spray up and down as the double up coat to provide a uniform appearance for a wet film thickness of 15-20 mils and a dry film thickness of 6.8-9 mils. This product is to be used at Level 5 finishes N. Veneer Plaster - USG Imperial Finish Plaster for Sand-Float Finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. In strict accordance with the contract documents, applicable building codes, requirements of the Gypsum Association design manual referenced above and the manufacturer's recommendations, installation of gypsum wallboard assemblies shall 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 7 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 provide the level of fire protection and permissible sound transmission called for in the drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING A. General: All metal framing for walls, partitions, bulkheads, suspended ceilings and metal furring on masonry walls shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and as shown on the Contract Drawings and ASTM C754. B. Partition framing systems 1. All metal framing shall be full height from floor to floor or floor to roof construction. 2. Partitions shall be aligned accurately according to the partition layout. Floor and ceiling runners shall be securely attached 24" o.c. to concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power driven anchors. 3. Provide sound-rated partitions at locations indicated on the Drawings. 4. Studs shall be positioned vertically in the runners, spaced no greater than 16" o.c. Anchor all studs located at partition intersections and corners to floor runner flanges with metal lock fastener or by positive screw engagement through each stud flange and runner flange. 5. Studs shall be located no more than 2" from all abutting partitions, partition corners and other construction. 6. Metal stud locations shall be coordinated with other related work to facilitate support and anchorage of wall cabinets, grab bars, towel bars, closet shelving, etc. Support for wall mounted items shall be provided by continuous vertical studs properly located in the wall for attachment of the item, or by horizontal sections of metal studs spanning between vertical studs, securely attached thereto and properly located in the wall for attachment of the item. 7. Install a double stud at jambs of each door or window frame. Grout jamb anchors in place with joint compound. 8. The top of all studs extending to the structure above shall be held a minimum of 1/2" below the structure to allow for deflection. Provide deflection angles or deflection track mechanically attached to web of studs; or ceiling runner may 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 8 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 be clinched to studs, but there is to be no screw attachment of ceiling runner channels to studs, but there is to be no screw attachment of ceiling runner channels to studs. 9. Protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, or unaligned members must be repaired before installation of wallboard is started. C. Suspended Ceiling System: 1. Hanger wires - Space at 4'- 0" o.c. maximum along carrying channels and within 6" of ends of carrying channel runs. In concrete, anchor hangers by attachment to reinforcing steel, by loops embedded at least 2", or by approved inserts. For steel construction, wrap hanger around or through beams or joists. 2. Where ducts or other mechanical interference's occur a rigid steel trapeze can be run under the interference and a ceiling hanger hung from the trapeze to preserve the 4' centers. Where headroom does not allow for this, the steel trapeze can be installed with an isolation hanger on each end and a solid ceiling wire hung from the trapeze to the floating ceiling. 3. Carrying channels - Install at 4'- 0" o.c. and within 6" of boundary walls or interruptions of ceiling continuity. Position channels for proper ceiling height, level and secure with hanger wire saddle-tied along channel. 4. Metal furring channels - Install at right angles to carrying channels. Space furring channels 24" o.c. and within 6" of walls. 5. At opening that interrupt the main runner or furring channels, install additional cross reinforcing to maintain structural integrity of framing. 6. Frame beams or trusses in accordance with tested assembly to achieve the required fire rating. 7. Recessed fluorescent fixtures in fire rated ceilings shall be provided with an approved fire "tent". 8. Recessed incandescent fixtures in fire rated ceilings shall be provided with a two sides (inverted ‘V’) 5/8” gypsum board “firetent”. Provide clearance around fixtures as required by fixture manufacturer. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 9 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 3.03 SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. All exterior stud walls are to be fully sheathed. B. Install sheathing per manufacturer's instructions using maximum length possible to minimize joints. Screw attach sheathing at 8" o.c. to studs at edges and in field. C. Cover sheathing with sheathing wrap. Lap over the top edges of any wall flashings. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WALLBOARD A. General: 1. Conform to requirements of ASTM C840,the manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions and ASA A97.1. 2. Use wallboard of maximum lengths to minimize end joints. Stagger end joints when they occur. Locate end joints as far as possible from center of wall or ceiling. 3. Abut wallboards without forcing. 4. Neatly fit ends and edges of wallboard. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. 5. Support ends and edges of wallboard panels on framing or furring members except for face layer of double layer and where ends are back blocked and floated. 6. Wallboard shall be cut neatly to fit around all outlets and switch boxes. All openings in drywall partitions shall be sealed tight. Refer to Section 07270 - Firestopping for firestop sealant requirements at fire-rated walls, partitions and ceilings. 7. The following clearances shall be maintained between edges of drywall surfaces and adjoining structural elements: 1/8" at floors; 1/4" at columns or walls. 8. Install control joints and expansion joints in wallboard areas at locations as shown on the Drawings. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 10 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 a) If not shown, they shall be located by this Contractor in accordance with the Reference Standards and the recommendations of the wallboard manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect. b) As a general rule, gypsum panel surfaces shall be isolated with expansion or control joints where: 1) Partitions or ceiling abuts a structural element (except floor) or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 2) Construction changes within the plane of the partition. 3) Partition, bulkhead or ceiling dimensions exceeds 30' maximum. 4) Expansion or control joints occur in the base wall or ceiling. 9. All wallboard partitions shall be isolated from floors above with sealant and deflection track. 10. Installation shall be similar on wood framing to that specified for metal framing, except screws shall be as recommended by wallboard manufacturer for use with wood framing. B. Single Layer Wallboard on Metal Framing: 1. Apply wallboard with long dimension at right angles to framing. Back block ends and edges of wallboard. Stagger all joints in a running bond pattern. 2. Attach wallboard to metal framing with Type "S" screws. Stagger fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges. Space screws 12" o.c. along supports at ceilings, and 16" o.c. along ends, edges and field of wallboard at walls. C. Double Layer Wallboard on Metal Framing: 1. Apply base layer with long dimension at right angles to framing. Attach to metal framing with type "S" screws at 16" o.c. along abutting ends or edges and 16" o.c. in the field. Stagger all joints in a running bond pattern. 2. Apply wallboard face layer perpendicular to edges of base layer. Center abutting ends or edges over center of base layer board surface. Attach face layer to framing with type "G" screws at 12" o.c. along ends and edges, and in the field. D. Cementitious Tile Backer Board on Metal Framing: 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 11 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Apply backer board with long dimension at right angles to furring. Back block ends and edges of backer board. Stagger all joints in a running bond pattern. 2. Attach backboard to furring with screws of type and spacing recommended by backer board manufacturer. Do not puncture surface of board with screw head. 3. Allow for continuous clearance of 1/8" at floor. 4. Finish joints with glass fiber joint tape embedded in dry set or latex portland cement mortar in a manner complying with Tile Council of America Handbook Standard for Installation W244. E. Sound Rated Partitions: Fabricate and erect in accordance with manufacture's instructions for the required rating. 1. Sound attenuation blanket - Press full width, full height insulation strips firmly into place and staple to the back face of the wallboard at one side only. Use stapling method recommended by the manufacturer of the insulating material. 2. Partition Perimeter—Cut gypsum boards for loose fit around partition perimeter. Leave a groove no more than 1/8” wide. Apply a 1/4” min. round bead of sealant to each side of runners, including those used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction. Immediately install boards, squeezing sealant into firm contact with adjacent surfaces. 3. Apply sealant at sides and backs of electric boxes and all cutouts in sound rated partitions. 4. Door Frames—Apply a bead of sealant in the doorframe just before inserting face panel. 5. Control Joints—Apply sealant beneath control joint to reduce path for sound transmission through joint. 6. Partition Intersections—Seal intersections with sound-isolating partitions that are extended to reduce sound-flanking paths. F. Wallboard Accessories: 1. Edge trim shall be installed at the exposed perimeter of all drywall surfaces at intersections with other materials, maintaining a uniform joint width of 1/4". Finish edge trim with joint compound as required. Treat joint with sealant. All 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 12 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 sealants to be furnished and installed under Section 07900: JOINT SEALANTS. 2. Corner bead shall be installed at all external corners and shall be taped and finished as typical joints. 3. Expansion joints shall be installed according to Contract Drawings, or if not shown follow the gypsum wallboard manufacturer's recommendations for expansion joints. 4. In sound and/or fire rated assemblies, provide backer rod and sealant behind the control or expansion joint on each face of the partition, as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer. G. Joint System in Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Joint system shall be used to finish all face board joints and internal angles formed by intersections of wallboard surfaces, except where isolation joints are required. 2. Allow 24 hours drying time between coats. Leave all depressions level with the plane of the surface. 3. Sanding between coats and of the final coat is required only as necessary to provide a smooth surface ready for painting. Do not roughen finish paper. No tool marks, humps, pock marks, or other evidence of poor workmanship will be acceptable. 4. Partition surfaces concealed above finished ceilings may have final coat of taping compound omitted. 5. Prefill - Fill "V" grooves formed by abutting rounded edges of wallboard with prefill joint compound. a) Fill "V" joint flush and remove excess compound beyond groove. Leave clear depression to receive tape. b) Permit prefill joint compound to harden prior to application of tape. 6. Taping: a) Apply compound in thin uniform layer to all joints and angles to be reinforced. b) Apply reinforcing tape immediately. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 13 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 c) Apply skim coat immediately following tape embedment but not to function as fill or second coat. d) Fold tape and embed in angles to form true angle. e) Permit embedding coat to dry prior to application of fill coat. 7. Filling: a) Apply joint compound over embedding coat. b) Fill taper flush with surface. c) Apply fill coat to cover tape. Feather out beyond tape and previous joint compound line. d) At joints with no taper, feather out at least 4" on either side of tape. e) Do not apply fill coat on interior angles. f) Allow fill coat to dry prior to application of finish coat. 8. Finishing: a) Spread joint compound evenly over and beyond fill coat on all joints. Feather to smooth, uniform finish. b) Apply finish coat to taper angles to cover tape and taping compound. c) Sand final application to provide smooth surface ready for decoration. 9. Filling and finishing depressions: a) Apply joint compound in at least three (3) coats. b) Sand final application. c) Leave filled and finished depressions level with plane of surface. 10. Finishing beads and trim: a) Apply joint compound in at least three coats. Allow to dry between coats. b) Sand final application to provide flat surface ready for decoration. 11. Levels of Finish: The following levels of finish are established as a guide for specific final decoration. The minimum requirements for each level shall be as described herein along with areas of use. a) Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 14 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 Use in plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in areas where the assembly would generally be concealed or in building service corridors, and other areas not normally open to public view. Use where a fire-resistance rating is required for the gypsum board assembly, details of construction shall be in accordance with reports of fire tests of assemblies that have met the fire-rating requirement. Tape and fastener heads need not be covered with joint compound. b) Level 2: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level. Use where cementitious tile backing board is used as a substrate for tile. c) Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Apply a coat of USG “First Coat” drywall primer, to the entire surface under the scope of work for this specification section. Use in appearance areas, which are to receive heavy, or medium texture (spray or hand applied) finishes before final painting. d) Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of join compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Apply a coat of USG “First Coat” drywall primer, to the entire surface under the scope of work for this specification section. 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 15 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 Use in appearance areas, where paints finishes are specified. e) Level 5: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. A skim coat, as defined in Part Two of these specifications, shall be applied to the entire surface under the scope of work for this specification section. Use this level in nave, narthex, and where indicated on drawings. No primer or paint is required H. Ridging: 1. Do not repair ridging until condition has fully developed; approximately six (6) months after installation or one heating season. 2. Sand ridges to reinforcing tape without cutting tape. 3. Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with topping compound. 4. After fill is dry, blend in with topping compound over repaired area. 3.05 VENEER PLASTER A. Framing of partitions and ceiling assemblies shall be as specified in 3.02 above. B. Gypsum veneer base shall be erected as specified in 3.04 above. C. Joint filling in veneer plaster: 1. Apply joint tape over all joints. Press firmly into corners and do not overlap. 2. Embed tape and fill beads with veneer plaster. Slightly underfill the bead by screeding along the bead with trowel edge. 3. Allow veneer plaster to set, but not dry, prior to application of veneer plaster finish. D. Veneer Plaster Application: 09 21 16 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD PAGE 16 OF 16 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Finish coat: Scratch in with thin coat and double back with finish plaster coat, filling all voids to leave a smooth dense surface. 2. Total thickness of veneer plaster: 1/16" - 1/32".] 3.06 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 1 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 24 13: CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING STUCCO PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all lathing and cement plastering work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Work of this section includes: 1. Exterior or cement plaster over metal lath, on wall assemblies and soffits. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, including the General Conditions of the Contract B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 05 40 00: Cold Formed Metal Framing D. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry E. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00200 - General Instructions to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARD A. "Manual of Lathing and Plastering", latest edition, as published by The Lathing and Plastering Industry Committee. B. Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual C ASTM C897 Aggregate for job-mixed Portland Cement-based plasters. 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 2 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 D. ASTM C926 Standard Specifications for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster E.. ASTM C1063 Standard Specifications for Installation of Lathing and Furring to receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's certificate that materials meet specification requirements. B. Manufacturer's written recommendations, proportion mixes, and installation instructions for factory prepared finish materials. C. Sample panels, 2'x 2', to be approved by the Architect for color and texture. D. Shop Drawings showing all expansion joints, control joints, typical details and accessories. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator qualifications: application of specified plaster systems on at least three projects equal in scope to the Work of this Project. B. Allowable tolerance of completed plasterwork: 1/8" maximum deviation from a true plane as measured from the line of a 10' straightedge placed at any location on the surface. C. Job Mock-Up: Erect a sample wall panel prior to application of all materials and accessories to be used. Build mock-up at the site, where directed, of full thickness and approximately 4 foot by 4 foot indicating proposed color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Prior to the start of work obtain Architect’s approval of the mock-up. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in original unopened packages, bundles or containers, with manufacturer's label intact and legible. B. Keep plaster, cement, lime and other cementitious materials dry, stored off ground, under cover and away from damp surfaces. 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 3 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Protect metal lath and metal accessories from dampness or wetting. D. Store metallic materials and accessories indoors, off floor. E. Remove wet and deteriorated materials from project site. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: (Exterior stucco) 1. Do not use-frozen materials in cement plaster mixes. 2. Do not apply cement plaster to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost. 3. Do not apply cement plaster unless minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees (10 degrees C.) has been and continues to be maintained for minimum of 48 hours prior to application and until plaster is cured. B. Protection: 1. Protect finished surfaces installed prior to plastering by covering with suitable nonstaining material. 2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Lath: 1. Diamond Mesh Lath: A small diamond mesh all purpose metal lath, such as Amico Self Furring Diamond Metal Lath or approved equal by Gold Bond, USG, Keene or Niles. a) Weight: 3.4 lbs. per square yard (end painted red) b) Finish: Galvanized c) Comply with FS QQ-L-101C and ASTM C847-88. B. Fasteners: As recommended by the lath manufacturer for securing lath to supports. 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 4 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Metal accessories: 1. Shapes used as grounds shall be sized to provide for required plaster thickness. 2. All metal accessories for exterior use shall be of zinc alloy, except as specifically noted otherwise. 3. Corner beads - 26 gauge, small nose type, expanded flanges. Amico X-1 or approved equal by Gold Bond, USG or Niles. 4. Casing beads - 24 gauge, square end style, with expanded flanges. Amico X- 66 or approved equal by Gold Bond, USG or Niles. 5. Inside Corner Expansion/Control Joints – Amico or equal by Gold Bond, Keene, USG, or Niles. 6. Expansion Joints - Amico M or W type expansion joint, 24 gauge,Gold Bond or equal by USG, or Niles. 7. Foundation Weep Screed - Amico No. 7 or equal by Gold Bond or USG. 8. Soffit Vent- Amico soffit vent AMFBSVE-100, Vinyl. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-89, Type I or II, gray for scratch and brown coats. E. Lime: Hydrated lime or a finely pulverized quick lime. Lime putty shall be prepared in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. 1. Hydrated Lime - ASTM C207-79, Type N or S 2. Pulverized Quick Lime - ASTM C5-79 F. Sand: ASTM C33-90, except that all sand shall pass a #4 sieve. G. Water: clean, fresh and free from such amounts of mineral and organic substances as would affect the hardening of the mortar. H. Cement Board- USG Durock, An aggregate Portland cement board with a glass- mesh reinforcement scrim. I. Finish coat for all cement plaster: 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 5 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Factory prepared finish coat for use over a Portland Cement base coat, as manufactured by TEC Specialty Products, Inc., a H.B. Fuller company. Use TEC Versatex Finish, color and texture shall be selected by the Architect and as shown on the mock-up sample. The finish is be manufactured with pigmentation to provide the approved coloring. No field color batching will be allowed. Color to be Mendocino #4002 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND ACCESSORIES A. Metal lath shall be secured to framing with screws spaced not more than 6" apart along the framing member and penetrate not less than ¾” into framing member and shall engage not less than three strands of lath.. 1. Install metal lath with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 2. Lap lath 1/2" minimum at sides, 1" minimum at ends, and wire tie together at 6" intervals maximum. B. Interrupt metal lath at all control and expansion joints. C. Apply one additional layer of metal lath diagonally at the corners of all openings for additional resistance to cracking. D. Metal accessories shall be fastened at both ends and at 7" intervals along their length, using corrosion-resistant fasteners of appropriate size and type. 1. Bring grounding edge of accessories to true lines, plumb, level and straight. 2. Install accessories to provide required plaster thickness and to bring plaster surface to required plane. 3. Where plaster abuts dissimilar materials, terminate with plaster casing bead. 4. Outside Corner Beads: Apply at outside corners throughout. 5. Inside Corner Mesh: Apply at inside corners throughout. 6. Stop/Casing Beads: a) Install around door, window, louver and similar framed openings so that a minimum 1/4″ wide sealant joint is created between wall finish and 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 6 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 framing. Install foundation drip screed at the bottom of walls at foundation. b) Apply stop/casing beads at all areas where wall panel end against dissimilar material to form a minimum 1/4″ gap for sealant joint. c) Where stop/casing bead section meet, overlap and apply 2″ wide bead of back-up sealant to substrate along splice before fastening stop/casing bead section in place. 5. Wall Control Joints: a) See drawings for control joint locations. Control joints shall be spaced a maximum of 18′ - 0″ o.c. in any direction with maximum area per panel of 144 square feet. 6. Eave and ceiling Control Joints: a) See drawings for control joint locations. Control joints shall be spaced a maximum of 18′ - 0″ o.c. in any direction with maximum area per panel of 100 square feet and a maximum length to width ratio of 2 ½ to 1. 3.02 PLASTER MIXES A. General Mixing Requirements: Mix all plaster by mechanical mixer. Mix each batch separately and clean mixer of hardened materials before loading materials for new batch. Conform to mixing sequence, cycle of operation and time recommended by manufacturer of plaster. 1. Proportion and measure material for each batch separately. 2. Size batches for complete use within one hour after mixing and to set within four (4) hours. 3. Do not retemper or use partially set plaster. 4. Do not use frozen, caked or lumpy material. 5. Mix factory-prepared plaster in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions for type of surface to which applied. 6. Measurements of ingredients shall be accurate and successive batches shall be proportioned exactly alike. Dry ingredients shall be mixed thoroughly before water is added. Water shall then be added and the mixing continued until the mixture is in a uniformly plastic condition of good plastering consistency. Thorough mixing is essential. 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 7 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 7. Withhold 10% of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then add as needed to produce necessary consistency. B. Cement Plaster Mixes 1. Portland cement plaster shall be proportioned, mixed and applied in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C926-90, APPLICATION OF PORTLAND CEMENT BASED PLASTER. 2. Mortar for scratch and brown coats shall consist of the following: a) 1 bag Portland Cement 1 bag masonry Cement 2½-4 cubic feet sand (scratch Coat) 3-5 cubic feet sand (Brown Coat) b) 1 bag Portland Cement 1/2 cubic foot hydrated lime 2½-4 cubic feet sand (scratch Coat) 3-5 cubic feet sand (Brown Coat) 3. Mixing of the specified finish coat material shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR PLASTER APPLICATION A. Examine surfaces to receive plaster for correctness. Starting of work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 1. Inspect for secured grounds, furring, screeds, corner beads, casing beads, plaster stops, expansion joints, cornerities, metal lath and accessories. 2. Verify that grounds are set to receive the specified thickness of plaster. 3. Do not proceed with application of plaster until conditions are correct and acceptable. B. Protect adjacent finished surfaces from damage during plastering operations. C. Clean surfaces to receive direct application of plaster. 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 8 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 1. Remove any dust, dirt, laitance, form release agents, curing compounds, coating or any other foreign materials that will interfere with proper adhesion 2. Surface will be frost-free. 3.04 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION A. General 1. Plaster may be applied by machine or by hand, except where machine application is required to produce the specified finish. B. Selected base coat system must provide a true, level, even surface without variation exceeding 1/4" ”under a 10 foot straight edge. C. The wall system applied in hot, dry weather shall be protected by tarpaulins hung over the outside to shade areas to be applied. D. When temperature is above 82 degrees Fahrenheit, and relative humidity is below 50% texture wall system base coat shall be dampened for at least 24 hours before drying. Dampening shall be done with a fine fog spray as soon as the base coat has set. Avoid soaking and saturating the wall. On hot/sunny days fog spray may be needed two or three times. 1. All undercoats shall be dampened to the proper degree by sprinkling to control suction, but there shall be no free water on the surface. E. Plaster thickness 1. Over metal lath: Minimum 1" measured from back of lath. F. Three-Coat Application on Metal Lath: 1. Apply scratch coat (first coat) with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys on metal lath. 2. Scratch or cross rake a rough surface and allow to set firm and hard. 3. Apply plaster screeds to scratch coat prior to application of brown coat. 4. Apply brown coat (second coat) and bring surfaces out to grounds. 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 9 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 5. Straighten to a true surface with rod and darby without application of water. 6. Scratch or cross rake and leave rough, ready to receive finish coat (third coat). G. Finish Coat Application: 1. General: a) Apply finish coat to basecoat, which is set and partially dry, or to set dry basecoat, which has been dampened by application of water. Avoid use of excessive amounts of water. b) Cut finish coat through full depth with trowel at intersection of plastered walls and plastered soffits. c) Color and texture to match existing on Phase 1 And 2 2. Float finishes: a) Lay on over basecoat with a trowel to a true, even surface, sand float finish. b) Float as required to produce a sanded surface free from slick spots or other blemishes and finish which matches accepted sample panel. 3.05 PATCHING A. Upon completion, point-up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets dissimilar materials. B. Cut out and patch defective and damaged plaster. C. Cut out and patch stained or discolored finish plaster not scheduled to be painted. D. Patch of defective or damaged plaster shall match previously applied plaster in form and texture, color if finish plaster is not scheduled to be painted. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove protective materials and plaster materials from adjacent surfaces. B. Remove stains from plaster surfaces that would affect finishes. 09 24 13 - CEMENT PLASTER AND LATHING (STUCCO) PAGE 10 OF 10 SCEC-III/08-08 C. At completion, clean all plaster from beads, screeds and metal trim, leaving work ready for decoration by others. E. Remove all plaster rubbish, excess material, scaffolding, tools and equipment from the building, leaving floors broom clean. Waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 09 27 13 - GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS (GFRG) PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 27 13: GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS (GFRG) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of molded reinforced gypsum decorative elements and associated work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork B. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard C. Section 09 90 00: Painting and Finishing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for approval showing plans, sections, details, joint treatment, reinforcing, fastening devices and the relation to adjacent construction. B. Submit a minimum of three 8" x 8" samples of entablature material for coating selection. C. Prior to production, erect one prototype assembly on-site for inspection by Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Allowable face width of erected unit's joint: within 3/16". B. Out of plane tolerance from unit to unit: within 3/16". C. Allowable warpage or bowing of erected units: within 1/16" per foot. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses or damage. B. Store units on a level and clean surface. 09 27 13 - GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS (GFRG) PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Molded reinforced gypsum decorative elements shall be prefabricated with extra-high strength glass fiber reinforced interior gypsum cement, as manufactured by Plastrglas, Inc., Omaha, NE (402) 455-0652, or approved equal. Physical Properties: Glass Fiber - 5-6% by weight, 1" length, type E, alkaline resistant Shell Thickness - 3/16" nominal Weight (depending on reinforcing) - 2 lbs./square foot minimum Density - Approx. 106 lbs./ cubic foot Finish - Smooth Tensile strength (ASTM D638-89) - 2,250 psi Flexural strength (ASTM C580) - 10,660 psi Compressive strength (ASTM C39-86) - 7,000 psi Shear strength (interlaminar) - 650 psi Fuel contributed (ASTM E84-89a) - 0 Flame spread (ASTM E84-89a) - 0 Smoke Index (ASTM E84-89a) - 0 Impact strength (ASTM D256) - 12.9 ft./lb./in B. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping bugle head screw fasteners shall be stainless steel. All other fasteners or connectors shall be stainless steel. C. Unit joints and fastener locations are to be finished with a joint finishing material as recommended by manufacturer to match unit material and texture. D. Wire hangers: 12 gauge, galvanized steel. E. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 09 27 13 - GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS (GFRG) PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Examine adjacent surfaces prior to erection of units for unevenness and irregularities that would affect quality and execution of work. Notify the General Contractor and Architect of any unacceptable conditions. B. Jobsite dimensions shall be checked prior to installation. Notify the General Contractor and Architect of any discrepancies between design and field dimensions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Units shall be lifted with suitable devices at points indicated by the manufacturer. B. Installation of units shall be plumb and level. C. The erector shall provide temporary supports to maintain position as units are being connected. D. Fasten units with screws (through the face or from the back), bolting or welding as shown on the Drawings. E. Slotted or oversize holes for connections shall allow for unit movement. F. Elements shall be painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Finishing. 3.03 PATCHING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Erected unit's joints shall be finished with proper patching material and reinforcement according to manufacturer's specifications. Smooth out and sand to match unit's texture. B. Countersunk fasteners and construction damages are to be patched to match unit's texture. C. Clean soiled units with detergent and water. D. Protect completed columns from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.04 JOINT FINISHING A. The joints between the reinforced gypsum units themselves and where they join drywall shall be taped and finished as per Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Wallboard. 09 27 13 - GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS (GFRG) PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 B. The joint shall follow the curvature of the unit if applicable. The installing contractor shall be responsible for repair of any surface imperfections resulting at the job site. C. Care shall be taken when taping and finishing flat joints between parts to prevent "crowning". 3.05 GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's written one (1) year warranty for replacement of defective materials. Provide contractor's written five (5) year warranty for labor costs to replace defective material. 3.06 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILE PAGE 1 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 30 13: CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all ceramic tile work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry B. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants C. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCA) "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", latest edition. B. ANSI A137.1 - "American National Standard Specifications for the manufacturing of Ceramic Tile", latest edition. C. ANSI A108 / A118 / A136 - "American National Standard for the Installation of Ceramic Tile", latest edition. D. ASTM C1028 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method, latest issue. E. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish- Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine, latest issue. F. ASTM F609 Standard Test Method for Using a Horizontal Pull Slipmeter (HPS), latest issue. G. ASMT F1679 Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT), latest issue. H. Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout and setting material. 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILE PAGE 2 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for materials required. Include certifications and other data to show compliance with these Specifications. B. For initial selection of colors, submit actual tiles showing full range of colors available for each type specified. Include samples of grout and accessories requiring color sections. C. After initial color selection by the Architect, submit full size samples for each type of tile. D. Provide shop drawings of all tile patterns showing layout and control joint locations. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with grade seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Keep tile cartons and all cementitious materials dry. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature at 50 degrees F. minimum during tile work and for seven (7) days after completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Floor Tile: Crossville Inc. Palais porcelain tile, laid in pattern # 6. (Consists of 6x 12 20% and 12 x12 80% with matching 6” x 12” single bullnose with coved base. At Chancel step provide single bullnose nosing. Colors shall be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's entire range of colors. 1. Minimum coefficient of friction 0.60 wet per ASTM C-1028. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a) Crossville, Inc. b) Equal products approved by the Architect under provisions of Section 01 62 00 B. Grout: 1. Latex Portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6, color chosen by Architect from 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILE PAGE 3 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 manufacturer's entire range of available colors. 2. Coloring agents: Double strength, consisting of inorganic compounds, used in proportions recommended by the manufacturer. C. Mortar: For thin set applications, Latex Portland Cement Mortar, ANSI A118.4, or dryset mortar, ANSI A118.1, as required by paragraph 3.04. D. Sealant: Two-component polysulfide sealant complying with Federal Standard TT-S- 00227E, Type II (non-sag) for joints in both vertical and horizontal surfaces. Tremco Dymeric, or approved equal. E. Water: Potable. F. Crack Isolation Sheet: NobleSeal CIS or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces to receive tile before installation begins for: 1. Defects or conditions adversely affecting quality and execution of tile installation. 2. Deviation beyond allowable tolerances of surfaces to receive tile. Maximum variation in the substrate shall be 1/8" in 10'- 0". 3. Surfaces to receive tile shall be firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films and curing compound. Mechanical scarifying is required to remove curing compound. B. Report any unacceptable conditions to the General Contractor immediately, and do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing conditions. No claims for remediation of unsatisfactory conditions will be allowed after work has begun. 3.02 LAYOUT A. Determine locations of all movement joints before starting tilework. B. Lay out all tilework so as to minimize cuts less than one-half tile in size. C. Locate cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous. D. Align all wall joints to give straight uniform grout lines, plumb and level. 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILE PAGE 4 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 E. Align all floor joints to give straight uniform grout lines, parallel with walls and continuous with wall joints. F. Provide expansion joints as shown on Contract Drawings, or if not indicated refer to manufacturer's recommendations for joint spacing. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Employ only skilled mechanics that are thoroughly familiar with the setting material and methods to be employed. Solidly set all tile in place. Keep all lines straight and true and bring finished surfaces to true planes. Cracked, broken or imperfect tile shall not be used. Form intersections at corners and with trim, etc., in a neat workmanlike manner. Neatly and carefully do all cutting and grinding as required for accurate fitting throughout. 3.04 SETTING METHODS A. Install ceramic floor tile and base tile, in accordance with the following TCA methods and ANSI installation standards: 1. Installation of porcelain floor tile: a) Follow TCA method F113 current edition with Latex - Portland cement mortar. b) Comply with tile installation Specification ANSI A108.5. Comply with grout installation Specification ANSI A108.10 c) Provide expansion joints at all edges and along lines of structural slab joints, including construction and cold joints. B. Joint widths shall be 1/4". C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars or covers overlap tile. E. Install floor crack isolation sheeting over control joints or cracks in flooring substrate. Installation shall be per sheet manufacturer's instructions. 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILE PAGE 5 OF 5 SCEC-III/08-08 3.05 GROUTING A. After tile has set a minimum of 24 hours, tile shall be thoroughly cleaned and the joints grouted and pointed. Grout shall be forced into the joints and finished smooth and concave. 3.06 SEALANT APPLICATION A. After grouting is complete, sealant shall be applied at all tile control joints locations as noted on the layout drawings and at locations of sheet isolation. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean tile surfaces as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting. B. Remove all grout haze, observing grout manufacturer's recommendations as to use of non-abrasive chemical cleaners. Acid shall not be allowed as a cleaning agent. C. Rinse tile work thoroughly with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect completed installations from damage due to subsequent construction operations. 3.09 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 51 00: ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of lay-in acoustical ceiling treatment in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, Including the General Conditions of the Contract B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry D. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard E. Division : Mechanical F. Division : Electrical 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00100 - Instructions to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A641 "Specification for Galvanized (Zinc-coated) Carbon Steel Wire. B. ASTM C635 "Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings". C. ASTM C636 "Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels". 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 D. ASTM E1264 "Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products". E. CISCA - Ceiling and Interior Systems Contractors Association Guidelines. F. Indiana Building Code, Latest Edition. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspended Acoustical Ceiling: 1. Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceiling system: Level within 1/8" in 12'. 2. Deflection of suspension system components and acoustical units: 1/360 of the span. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for all products furnished under this Section, including ceiling suspension systems, acoustical tile and panels, accessories, etc. B. One full size sample of each suspension system component. C. Two full size samples of each type acoustical material. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging, with manufacturer's labels legible and intact, indicating brand name, pattern size, thickness and fire rating as applicable. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. C. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. D. Follow special instructions of Manufacturer. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install acoustical materials until the building is completely roofed and enclosed; and all plastering, masonry, concrete, tile work and other "wet" operations 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 are complete. B. Maintain maximum humidity level of 65% - 75% in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed for twenty-four (24) hours before, during, and twenty-four (24) hours after installation. C. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55° F. to 90° F. for twenty-four (24) hours prior to and during installation of materials. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceiling system: Level within 1/8" in 12'. B. Allowable deflection of suspension system components: 1/360 of the span. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Suspended Acoustical Ceiling: 1. ACT-1 Standard Acoustical Panels - 24″ x 24″ x 3/4″ thick lay-in panels with beveled tegular edges recessed to receive 9/16″ grid. Approved products: a) Cirrus Classic Motifs “Embassy” #526" tile, by Armstrong. b) Equal products approved by the Architect by U. S. Gypsum Interiors or Celotex, c) Equal approved under provisions of Section 01630. 2. ACT-2 Standard Acoustical Panels - 24″ x 24″ x 5/8″ thick lay-in panels with beveled tegular edges recessed to receive 9/16″ grid. Approved products: a) “Tundra” #304 tile, by Armstrong. b) Equal products approved by the Architect by U. S. Gypsum Interiors or Celotex. c) Equal approved under provisions of Section 01630. 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Suspension Systems - Armstrong Superfine 9/16″, double web, direct hang, exposed, heavy-duty. Main runners shall conform to the heavy-duty classification of ASTM C635. Provide reveal-type wall angle moldings as required for completed, finished installation. Hanger Wire: Minimum 12-gauge galvanized steel wire, complying with Federal Specification QQ-W-461. Grid system shall be compatible with panel system. Approved Manufacturers: a) Donn Ceiling Suspension Systems of U. S. Gypsum Interiors. b) Armstrong Industries. c) Chicago Metallic. d) Equal approved under provisions of Section 01630. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work. Notify the Architect of any unacceptable conditions. B. Installation of acoustical systems in any area denotes acceptance by this Contractor of condition of related work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Suspended Acoustical Ceiling: 1. Install all materials in accordance with ASTM C636-86 and with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows. Coordinate layout of grid with lights and air diffusers to permit an orderly and 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 expeditious procedure in executing work in this Section. 3. Do not install ceiling panels until work of other trades above ceiling has been completed and approved. 4. The suspended metal grid systems shall be supported by hanger wire attached to primary structural components. a) No hanger shall pass through ducts or be attached to pipes, ducts or conduit. b) Maximum spacing of hanger wire, 4'- 0" o.c. Use double lock type tie around main runners. c) The suspension system shall be designed to carry the weight of light fixtures. 5. Install wall channel/molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. a) Miter corners where wall molding intersect, or install corner caps. b) Attach to vertical surface with mechanical fasteners. c) Exposed fasteners are not permitted. 6. Ceiling grid system installation shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings, spacing units symmetrically about the centerlines of areas in both directions, with all edges in alignment and all faces in a level plane. Provide all necessary grid accessories for complete installation. The grain direction of adjacent panels shall be continuous, checkerboard patterns will not be acceptable. 7. At cut edges of tile, re-cut tile to profile to match factory edge. 8. Rest entire perimeter of lay-in ceiling board on flanges of tees with board units fitting neatly against abutting surfaces. 9. Install hold-down clips in fire-rated ceilings when required by tests. Also install hold-down clips in all entrance vestibules. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion, the acoustical ceiling work shall be left clean, straight and level without sag or buckle. 1. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Touch-up exposed cut edges, scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces. 3. Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units, regardless of cause, at no cost to Owner. 3.04 ADDITIONAL STOCK A. Upon substantial completion provide three (3) extra cartons of each type and color of acoustical tile and twenty (20) linear feet of each type and color of suspension grid utilized for Owner's use. 3.05 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 65 00: RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all resilient flooring and base work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, including the General Conditions of the Contract B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete D. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork E. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard F. Section 09 68 00: Carpets G. Section 09 68 13: Carpet Tile 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete range of manufacturer's samples for Architect's selection. B. If requested, submit full size samples of selected resilient flooring and base. C. Submit shop drawings showing patterns and seam layout of sheet linoleum. D. Submit printed cleaning and maintenance instructions, in duplicate, for all resilient flooring. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Installer shall be approved by the flooring manufacturer, and shall have at least five (5) years’ experience in flooring installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Premium Tile: Victory vinyl tile by Centiva. Thickness .120". Size and pattern as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard. B. Vinyl Composition Tile: 1/8" thick, 12" x 12", Armstrong Standard Excelon Tile, or approved equal. Colors as selected by Architect. Color will be an important consideration in evaluation of a proposed equivalent material. C. Base: Rubber, 4" high x .125" thick, plain color, FS SS-W-40a, 120' roll. 1. All base shall be set-on cove type, except in areas schedule to receive carpet flooring, where straight base shall be used. 2. Outside and inside corners shall be factory preformed. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a) Endura Flooring, Waltham, Massachusetts b) Armstrong c) Burke d) Mercer Products Company. e) Johnsonite f) Flexco g) Roppe h) VPI D. Adhesives: As recommended by the manufacturer. E. Edge Strips: Tapered solid vinyl, thickness and configuration to match adjacent flooring material. Color shall be selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 A. Examine surfaces to receive resilient flooring. Surface defects in the concrete subfloor shall be filled with a material as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Ridges, trowel marks and other surface projections shall be ground smooth. B. Subfloor must be thoroughly clean and dry before application of resilient flooring. Remove all dust, grease, paint, etc., paying particular attention to edges and corners. C. Resilient flooring material shall be installed only when the temperature in the space is between 70° F. and 90° F. Materials shall be stored on the job at these temperatures for at least 24 hours prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be deferred until other work that might cause damage to the flooring has been completed. Install all materials in strict compliance with the flooring manufacturer's instructions. B. Install all flooring over clean subfloor according to manufacturer's current written installation instructions. C. Lay flooring so that all joints are closed as tightly as possible. D. Install tapered edging at all exposed edges of resilient flooring. E. Install base in a full bed of adhesive, with minimum number of joints. Match edges at all seams or double cut adjoining lengths. Install with tight butt joints with no joint widths greater than 1/64". 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately upon completion of installation in a room or an area, floors and adjacent surfaces shall be dry cleaned with an approved cleaner to remove surplus adhesive and other soiling. Five (5) days or more after installation, floors shall be washed with an approved non-alkaline cleaning solution and rinsed thoroughly with clean water. All resilient floors shall be left clean, ready for waxing. Floor wax will be furnished and applied by the Owner. B. From the time of laying until acceptance, flooring exposed to traffic or subject to damage because of subsequent building operations shall be covered with building paper, vegetable-fiber board, plywood or other suitable material that will not mar flooring. Flooring damaged by trade traffic shall be replaced at not cost to the Owner. 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 3.04 ATTIC STOCK A. Upon completion of work, provide to Owner two percent (2%) of each pattern or color of resilient material used, but never less than a 5' long section the full width of a roll or ten tiles for Owner's future use. 3.05 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 – CARPET TILE PAGE 1 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 68 13: CARPET TILE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to completion of all carpet tile work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Includes adhesives and accessories. 2. Includes preparation of existing substrates in remodeled areas. 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 09 65 00: Resilient Flooring and Base 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings of carpet tile layout, including pile or pattern direction, tile joint locations, and locations of edge strips. Indicate locations of columns, walls, doorways, built-in cabinets and locations of cutouts in carpet tile. B. Samples: 1. Submit full size tile of each type, color and pattern of actual carpet tile required and 12-inch (300 mm) long samples of each type of edge strip required. Do not begin manufacturing until written approval of samples has been received from the Architect. C. Documents: 1. Submit certified letter stating that the installer is approved or acceptable to the carpet manufacturer furnishing carpet for this Project to install carpet types specified. Include list of projects completed by the installer in last two (2) years; include name of carpet, carpet manufacturer, square yards installed and type of installation. 2. Submit certifications from carpet manufacturer stating that materials furnished comply with specified requirements, including supporting certified laboratory test reports indicating that carpet meets test requirements specified for fire performance characteristics and physical properties. 09 68 13 – CARPET TILE PAGE 2 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 3. Submit two (2) copies of notarized affidavits stating that the carpet tile, as furnished and installed, complies with Class I requirements. Include the following with each affidavit: a) Name of product. b) Name and address of Project in which product was used. c) Name and address of nationally recognized independent testing laboratory, which performed the testing; include laboratory project number or test number of date of test. d) Test results, including flame spread and smoke developed. 4. Maintenance Manuals: a) Submit three (3)-printed copies of manufacturer’s recommendations for care, cleaning, and maintenance of each type of carpet specified. 5. Submit written warranty executed by Contractor, Installer and Carpet Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace, at no additional cost to Owner, carpet tile that fails in materials and workmanship within two (2) years after date of Substantial Completion. Failures included under this warranty include but are not limited to runs, snags, edge ravel, loss of tuft bind, delamination, unevenness of the carpet, loose seams or edges. In addition the manufacturer shall warranty for ten (10) years against excess wear or the loss of more than 10 percent of face fiber. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Carpet manufacturer shall have produced commercial carpet tile of types required for this Project for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer shall be a firm specializing in carpet tile installation with not less than two (2) year's experience in installation of carpet tile similar to types and of scope required for this project. a) Firm shall be approved by, or acceptable to carpet manufacturer furnishing carpet tile for this Project. C. Carpet Standard: 1. Manufacturers' carpet data is shown in Data Sheets attached to the end of this Section, for convenience in identifying the types of carpet required. Unless modified by notations, the manufacture's data for indicated carpet constitutes the requirements of that carpet. 09 68 13 – CARPET TILE PAGE 3 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 2. The use of a manufacturer's carpet data is not intended to preclude the use of other carpets, provided they are equivalent. Carpet data is included for the purpose of establishing a standard of materials, composition, construction, performance, design, color and appearance. 3. Manufacturer's seeking prebid approval of matching products must submit samples and specifications of same for Architect's approval per Section 01 62 00. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver materials until a clean, enclosed, weather-tight and properly conditioned space is available at the Project site. Deliver, store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Deliver materials to Project site in original protective wrappings and containers, with manufacturer's identification tags attached intact. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Before start of carpet work, deliver to the Owner not less than five percent of each type, color and pattern of carpet tile selected, over and above quantities required to properly complete installation. Furnish extra (replacement) carpet tile from same production run as carpet tile installed. Furnish certification indicating exact quantity of extra carpet tile actually delivered. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General 1. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7, "Site Conditions". B. Concrete Sub floor Moisture Conditions 1. Moisture emission rate of sub floor shall not exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square foot per 24 hours when tested according to ASTM F 1869 Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test) Test results must not exceed the limits specified in ASTM F 710 and CRI 104, 7.10.1. C. Concrete sub floor testing for Alkalinity 1. A pH range of 7-9 is satisfactory; however a reading above 9 requires corrective measures. Perform testing in accordance with ASTM Standard Practice F-710; or consult the adhesive manufacturer for recommended testing and corrective procedures. D. Bond testing must be run to determine compatibility of the adhesives to the concrete slab. 09 68 13 – CARPET TILE PAGE 4 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET DATA SHEETS A. See sub-section 3.06 Carpet Tile Schedule for specific requirements for each type carpet tile required. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Carpet Edge Guard 1. Extruded or molded rubber or vinyl of size and profile required to suit type carpet, installation method and Project conditions. Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. B. Carpet Tile Adhesive 1. Release type, non-flammable as recommended by carpet manufacturer.. C. Miscellaneous Carpet Materials 1. Approved products recommended by manufacturers of carpet and accessories and selected by installer to suit Project conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub floors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of carpet manufacturer. B. See Spec “1.07Project Conditions.” Examine sub floors and conditions for Compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, compatibility of adhesive to the substrate, installation tolerances of substrates and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Report any unacceptable conditions to the General Contractor immediately, and do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing conditions. No claims for remediation of unsatisfactory conditions will be allowed after work has begun. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Repair minor floor irregularities using materials recommended by carpet or adhesive manufacturer, as applicable. B. Thoroughly clean surfaces scheduled to receive carpet, removing grit, dirt, grease, oil, lumps of paint, drywall compound, concrete or other similar substances. Vacuum areas clean immediately before starting installation. 09 68 13 – CARPET TILE PAGE 5 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Apply type sealer compatible with adhesives to concrete surfaces where required to prevent dusting. D. Check critical dimensions at the building site to ensure that planned use of materials will fulfill requirements, including locations of seams. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with CRI 104, Section 14 “Carpet Modulels.” 2. Install carpet tile in compliance with carpet and adhesive manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations applicable to Project conditions and in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. 3. Start installation only after construction and finish work with spaces scheduled to receive carpet have been completed and environmental conditions are within limits recommended by carpet manufacturer. 4. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, and movable furnishings and into contiguous spaces, door reveals, closets, alcoves and similar openings. 5. Install carpet edge guards, where carpet edges are exposed, including where carpet abuts dissimilar flooring materials, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Return to installation approximately six (6) months after Owner's initial occupancy and use. Inspect carpet in each space, adjust carpet at edges, trim and repair faulty seams. B. Remove and dispose of dirt, debris, and scraps not retained by the Owner. Remove visible adhesives, seam sealer, and other surfaces blemishes using cleanser and methods recommended by carpet manufacturer, or remove and replace carpet if adhesives, sealer, and blemishes cannot be removed. Remove loose threads with sharp scissors. Vacuum carpet clean using commercial machines with face beater elements. Leave entire carpet installation in clean condition. C. Provide protection complying with CR1 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installation” and as required to ensure that carpet will be without damage at Substantial Completion. Protection sheeting in all work traffic areas shall be Polytack Protection 3 mil x 48" polyethylene sheet with self-adhesive back. 3.05 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. 09 68 13 – CARPET TILE PAGE 6 OF 6 SCEC-III/08-08 3.06 CARPET TILE SCHEDULE A. Carpet Tile C-3: Walk-Off Tile. Mohawk, Modular Carpet Tile, Quarter Turned. Color to be as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard colors. 1. Size: 19.69” x 19.69” 2. Style: Luxor 3. Construction: Needle Felt 4. Pile Content: 100% PP with Permanent Anti-Static 5. Pile Weight: 328.0 oz .per square yard 6. Color Technique: Solution Dyed 7. Backing Material: Bitumen 8. Installation Method: Releasable adhesive. B. Carpet Tile C-2: Allow $28.00 per square yard for materials END OF SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 1 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 09 90 00: PAINTING AND FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all painting and finishing work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. These Specifications cover the complete painting and finishing of all exposed surfaces throughout the interior and exterior of the building, unless otherwise specified. C. Examine the Specification for the various other trades for provisions regarding their painting. All surfaces that are left unfinished by the requirements of other specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this Section. D. Exterior surfaces which are to be painted or finished: 1. Ferrous metal items which is not factory finished. 2. All exposed wood or Composite Trim. E. Interior surfaces which are not to be painted: 1. Exposed pipes, ducts and conduit in Mechanical Rooms, storage and utility spaces. 2. Surfaces which are not to be painted shall be kept free of overspray, paint smears, and other damage resulting from work of this section. 3. Prefinished wood and prefinished millwork. 4. All other prefinished products; however prime painted products shall be painted. F. Interior and exterior painting of mechanical and electrical work: All such work is the responsibility of this Contractor, and shall comply with requirements of this Section, except that piping and duct work within mechanical, electrical and utility equipment rooms shall be painted (if required) by their respective mechanical or electrical contractors. 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 2 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, including the General Conditions of the Contract B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 03 30 00: Cast in Place Concrete D. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry E. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications F. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork G. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants H. Section 08 11 13: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames I. Section 08 14 16: Wood Doors (Flush) J. Section 08 31 00: Access Doors K. Section 08 52 13: Aluminum Clad Wood Windows L. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard M. Division : Mechanical N. Division : Electrical 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00200 - Instructions to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete list of proposed materials. For each surface, list materials by manufacturer and name and list number of coats. List appropriate thinners if other than water or mineral spirits. 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 3 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 B. If proposed materials are other than those specifically listed in the Painting Schedule herein, submit manufacturer's technical data for each product, including a complete analysis showing composition by weight of both pigment and vehicle. C. Submit duplicate samples of selected colors. Samples shall be approximately 12" square. 1. Submit transparent wood finish samples on woods specified in Section 06400 - Finish Carpentry and Millwork. 2. Submit smooth surface opaque paint finish samples on 1/8" hardboard or gypsum wallboard. D. After completing all painting work, furnish to the Owner a color chart giving complete details for color mixing codes as needed for future color matching. In addition, provide one (1) gallon of each color and type utilized on project for Owner's future use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The following manufacturers are approved, in addition to any specialty manufacturers listed in the schedule: 1. Porter Paints 2. Sherwin-Williams 3. Duron 4. ICI - Dulux 5. M.A.B. Paints 6. Benjamin Moore 7. Pittsburgh Paints 8. Pratt and Lambert B. All materials used on the work shall be of the brand and quality specified or shall be comparable products by any of the approved manufacturers. Deliver materials at the site of work ready-mixed, in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. C. All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's label directions. D. All materials such as linseed oil, shellac and turpentine shall be pure and of highest quality. They shall bear identifying labels on the containers. E. Any necessary materials not specifically covered and specified in this section shall be subject to the Architect's approval. 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 4 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 2.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. All materials used on the job shall be stored in designated locations. Such storage places shall be kept neat and clean and all damage thereto or to its surroundings shall be corrected. B. All soiled or used rags, waste, and trash must be removed from the building each night, and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire. C. Protect surfaces and objects inside and outside the building, as well as adjacent properties against damage due to painting operations. D. At completion of work, remove from the premises all surplus painting materials and all debris resulting from this work. Remove all splatters and leave the work in a clean and finished condition. 2.03 COLORS A. All colors shall be selected and approved by the Architect. B. For bidding purposes assume an average of a three (3) colors per room excluding woodwork, railings and stairs, exposed piping and ductwork, and exposed structural steel) for walls, ceilings and trim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work. B. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating application until conditions are suitable. Commencement of work indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Broom clean entire area before starting painting work. B. Clean surfaces to be painted. Wash metal, whether primed or not, with clean mineral spirits. Wash other surfaces, if dirty, with appropriate cleaners, and rinse off residue. Sand edges and putty holes as required to produce reasonably smooth surfaces. C. Remove small rust areas and rust stains from metal. If rust is extensive, report condition 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 5 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 to Architect. D. Sand and fill rough surfaces. Spackle interior holes and cracks. Putty fastener holes and other small irregularities after applying primer. Seal knots and pitch spots as recommended by selected manufacturer, avoiding the use of shellac in damp areas. E. Protect adjacent surfaces and items. Remove or protect such items as light fixtures, acoustical ceilings, windows and window sills, etc. Easily removed items such as electrical plates and hardware must be removed prior to painting. F. Cotton or canvas covering over insulation on pipes, ducts, tanks and other equipment, in all exposed locations, shall be given two coats of non-penetrating size to which fungicide has been added. The size shall be lightly tinted to facilitate identification and shall be applied to completely seal the surface. G. Drywall surfaces shall be clean, free from grit, loose spackling and surface irregularities and shall have an instrument measured moisture content not exceeding 8%. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes; dampen with clean water, and fill with thin layers of drywall joint cement. Allow to dry and sand smooth. Do not raise nap of paper on wallboard. H. Wood Surfaces: Clean soiled surfaces. Sand to smooth and even surface, then dust off. For painted finish, apply knot sealer to all knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before priming coat is applied. Fill nail holes, cracks open joints and other defects with wood filler after priming coat has dried. Color shall match finish color. I. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: Concrete shall be fully cured and as free of moisture as possible. Surface must be at least 55° until coating is cured. Remove grease, dirt, paint, form release and curing agents, loose mortar and other surface contaminants. Hollow areas, holes, protrusions and sharp edges shall be filled or ground smooth prior to painting. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not paint when temperature of air or surfaces being painted is below 50 degrees F. Do not paint when atmosphere is damp. Do not paint damp surfaces. These regulations may be waived by the Architect for specific products intended for cold or damp use. Request waivers in writing in advance of starting work. B. Do not paint unless temporary lighting is adequate. C. Provide ventilation during painting and drying periods. 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 6 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 3.04 APPLICATION A. Follow manufacturer's directions for application and rate of coverage. B. Apply paint evenly. Produce uniform surfaces. Avoid runs, sags, brush or roller marks, "holidays", differences in sheen or color, and other blemishes. C. Specified number of coats of paint is based on the assumption that quality of paint, opacity of pigments, extent of thinning, and quality of workmanship will be good. If Contractor disputes the scheduled systems, notify the Architect in writing before starting work. Otherwise, apply additional coats as required to achieve performance requirements specified in paragraph B above. D. Brush paint into cracks and seams. E. Cut straight, neat edges. Curved edges shall be uniform and neat. F. Do not allow paint to gel on adjacent surfaces. Clean up spills and spatters as soon as possible, and no later than the end of the day. G. Allow each coat to dry as recommended by manufacturer before applying following coat. Sand lightly between coats. H. Back prime exterior wood trim. I. Apply paintable wood preservative to exterior wood doors, sash, frames, columns, pilasters and related trim prior to prime coat and paint. Application shall include cut ends prior to installation. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. General 1. Paint concealed surfaces, such as door tops and bottoms, panel frames and edges, and cabinet interiors. For concealed surfaces on the exterior and in damp locations, number of coats shall be the same as for exposed surfaces. For semi-concealed surfaces, such as the tops of doors which can be seen from above, apply at least two coats of paint. For fully concealed surfaces in dry locations, one sound prime coat is sufficient. Back-painting of interior woodwork is not required. Woodwork is specified to conform to the AWI requirements, which require preservative treatment in damp locations. 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 7 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 2. Paint mechanical and electrical products unless they are fully concealed and corrosion-resistant or are pre-finished. Such products located within Mechanical and Electrical Rooms shall be considered concealed. All exterior mechanical roof vents and electrical boxes shall be painted. 3. Paint exposed mechanical and electrical products, which are not corrosion- resistant. Painting mechanical and electrical products, which are corrosion- protected, such as stainless steel, copper, brass, and products with sound shop finish, is not required, except as specifically noted otherwise. B. Scheduled Products: Materials listed in the following schedule are identified as products of a specific manufacturer for the purpose of establishing a standard of performance and quality. Comparable products by any of the approved manufacturers may be used. Refer to paragraph 2.01 A and 1.04A. C. Exterior surfaces (products are by Porter Paint unless noted otherwise): 1. Ferrous metal surfaces, except as noted: a) Preparation - Remove all rust and mill scale by hand or power tool cleaning and treat with Porter No. 70 Metalprep as required.. b) 1st coat - Porter No. 272/276 Porter Guard Metal Primer (spot prime factory primed surfaces). c) 2nd coat - Porter No. 2749 Porter Guard Alkyd Gloss Enamel. d) 3rd coat - Porter No. 2749 Porter Guard Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Galvanized Metal Surfaces: a) Preparation - Wash with Porter No. 5132 Thinner. Treat with Porter No. 5 Galvaprep. b) 1st coat - Porter No. 212/215 Porter Guard DTM Metal Primer / Finish. c) 2nd coat - Porter No. 2749 Porter Guard Alkyd Gloss Enamel. d) 3rd coat - Porter No. 2749 Porter Guard Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 3. Woodwork & Trim to Receive Paint: a) 1st coat - Zinc napthemate preservative (MAB Wood-Lastic), apply double coat. b) 2nd coat - Porter No. 74130 Speedy Prime Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer. c) 3rd coat - Porter No. 619 Acrylic Gloss House Paint. d) 4th coat - Porter No. 619 Acrylic Gloss House Paint. 4. Composite (Cementious) Trim to Receive Paint: 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 8 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 a) 1st coat - Porter No. 619 Acrylic Gloss House Paint. b) 2nd coat - Porter No. 619 Acrylic Gloss House Paint. 5. Wood and Trim to be Stained: a) 1st coat - 1/2 part Olympic Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. b) 2nd coat - Olympic Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. D. Interior Surfaces 1. Ferrous metal surfaces, except as noted: a) Preparation - Remove dust and millscale by hand or power tool. Clean and treat with Porter No. 79 Metalprep. b) 1st coat - Porter No. 272/276 Porter Guard Alkyd Metal Primer (spot prime factory primed surfaces). c) 2nd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. d) 3rd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. 2. Galvanized metal surfaces: a) Preparation - Treat with Porter No. 5 Galvaprep. b) 1st coat - Porter No. 215 Rust-Screen. c) 2nd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. d) 3rd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. 3. Drywall surfaces scheduled to receive PAINT, SATIN: a) 1st coat - Porter No. 867 Promaster 2000 Latex Primer / Sealer. b) 2nd coat - Porter No. 6129 Promaster 2000 Eggshell. c) 3rd coat - Porter No. 6129 Promaster 2000 Eggshell. 4. Drywall surfaces scheduled to receive ENAMEL: a) 1st coat - Porter No. 867 Promaster 2000 Latex Primer Sealer. b) 2nd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. c) 3rd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. 5. Woodwork and Trim (Opaque Finish): a) 1st coat - Porter No. 6064 Promaster 2000 Fast Dry Enamel undercoat. (Omit prime coat at shop primed clad wood windows and doors and door frames on 08 14 16) 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 9 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 b) 2nd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin enamel. c) 3rd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin enamel. 6. Woodwork and Trim (Transparent Finish): a) 1st coat - Porter No. 832 Wood Guardian Alkyd Wiping Stain (for open grain woods, mix with equal parts of paste wood filler and follow with another coat of stain). b) 2nd coat - Porter No. 857 (thin 10%) Urethane Satin. c) 3rd coat - Porter No. 857 Urethane Satin (sand lightly between 2nd and 3rd coats). 7. Stained Concrete Floor Prepare concrete surface and install products per manufacturer’s recommendations a) grind/polish concrete b) stain with acid stain c) polish d) Seal with “Euco“Diamond Hard” (a liquid densifier and sealer) 8. Exposed-to-view Aluminum Covering over Pipe Insulation: a) Preparation - Clean and treat with Porter No. 33 Aluminprep. b) 1st coat - Porter No. 272/276 Porter Guard Alkyd Primer. c) 2nd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin enamel. d) 3rd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin enamel. 9. Exposed-to-View Fabric Covering Over Pipe and Equipment Insulation: a) 1st coat - Porter No. 867 Promaster 2000 Latex Primer Sealer. b) 2nd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. c) 3rd coat - Porter No. 129 Alkyd Satin Enamel. 3.06 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND FINISHING PAGE 10 OF 9 SCEC-III/08-08 END OF SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 10 28 13: TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all toilet and miscellaneous accessories work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, including the General Conditions of the Contract B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry D. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants E. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard F. Section 09 30 13: Ceramic Tile G. Division : Mechanical H. Division : Electrical 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00200 - Instructions to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures. 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Accessory Specialties, inc. B. A & J Washroom Accessories C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 10 28 13 - TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PAGE 2 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Bradley Corporation/Washroom Accessories Division E. McKinney/Parker Co. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule of accessories, manufacturer's descriptive data, fastener descriptions, catalog cuts and installation requirements for products specified herein and shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Submit maintenance data, operating instructions, and keys required for each type of equipment and lock. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces. D. Maintain protective covers on all units until installation is complete. Remove protective covers at final clean-up of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT MANUFACTURER A. The items listed below are all as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Classic Series. Comparable products by any one of the acceptable manufacturers are permitted, subject to the approval of the Architect. All stainless steel to be type 304, ASTM A666, No. 4 satin finish. 2.02 TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Mirror: B165 2436, standard glass with stainless steel frame, concealed mounting. B. Mirror: B165 60 36, standard glass with stainless steel frame, concealed mounting. C. Combo Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle, recessed: B3944, C-fold towels. 10 28 13 - TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PAGE 3 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: B2740, twin rolls. E. Grab Bar: B5806, 36" long and 1-1/4" diameter, stainless steel with concealed mounting. Provide anchors for installation in partitions. F. Grab Bar: B5806, 42" long and 1-1/4" diameter, stainless steel with concealed mounting. Provide anchors for installation in partitions. G. Robe Hook: B672 Locate on door in Toilet compartment of Dressing room. H. Soap Dispenser by Owner I. Mop Holder: B223x24 (Locate in each Janitor Room). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Inspection: 1. Check all openings and surfaces to receive accessories for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work. 2. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions that affect installation of accessories. Verify preparation and reinforcing of toilet partitions, which are to receive accessories. 3. All fasteners shall be vandal-resistant, one-way, chrome plated. 4. Report unacceptable conditions to the General Contractor and Architect. Do not install accessories until all conditions are acceptable. B. Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Adjust accessories for proper operation. After completion of installation, clean and polish all exposed surfaces. D. Deliver keys and instruction sheets to Owner. E. Coordinate installation of recessed accessories with the mason and other framing trades. 3.02 DISPOSAL 10 28 13 - TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PAGE 4 OF 4 SCEC-III/08-08 A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 10 44 00: FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all individual fire extinguishers, fire extinguisher cabinets and wall brackets. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, including the General Conditions of the Contract B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry D. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants E. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard F. Division : Mechanical G. Division : Electrical 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00200 - Instructions to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. All equipment, apparatus and installations shall conform to the requirement of the State Fire Marshal, the NFPA and other authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment and apparatus shall be U.L. listed and labeled. 10 44 00 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN 2. J. L. Industries, Bloomington, MN 3. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico, Inc., Owatonna, MN 4. Potter - Roemer, Smith Industries, Union, NJ. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTINGUISHERS A. Chemical Extinguishers: Fully charged; 5 lbs. pressurized multi-purpose dry chemical; U.L. rated 3A-40B:C minimum; complete with polyester/epoxy paint finished steel cylinder, corrosion resistant valve, gauge and double-braided hose with durable nozzle, Larsen MP5A. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS - SEMI RECESSED A. Description: Semi recessed type steel cabinet similar to Larsen's Architectural Series Model No. 2409-5R with square trim. B. Provide fire rated cabinet option for cabinets located in rated partitions. C. Door: Solid, spring tension friction catch, continuous piano hinge, with vertical glass windows (Duo). D. Finish: White baked enamel on inside and outside of cabinet. 2.03 WALL BRACKETS A. Description: Galvanized or cadmium finished steel bracket as appropriate for the specified extinguisher. Provide a wall bracket for each individually mounted extinguisher at locations as shown on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CABINET INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets at locations as shown on the drawings. 10 44 00 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 B. Top of cabinet shall be located at 5'- 0" above finished floor. C. Cabinets shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Completed installation shall be level, plumb, tightly fitted and securely anchored. 3.02 WALL BRACKET INSTALLATION A. Install brackets at locations as shown on the drawings, at a height to place the top of the extinguisher 4'- 8" above the floor. B. Brackets shall be secured to mounting surface using corrosion resistant anchors of a type appropriate for the substrate. C. Bracket installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 CLEANUP A. Upon completion, clean all extinguishers and all exposed surfaces of cabinets and brackets. B. Touch up any scratches, nicks or abrasions in the cabinet surfaces, using a touch up enamel as supplied by the cabinet manufacturer. C. Tag and date all extinguishers at substantial completion. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by the Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 12322 - MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND CASEWORK - (PLASTIC LAMINATE) PAGE 1 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 12 32 16: MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND CASEWORK (PLASTIC LAMINATE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to furnish and install premanufactured cabinets and casework in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 0: Bidding and Contract Requirements, including the General Conditions of the Contract B. Division 1: General Requirements C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry D. Section 06 40 00: Finish Carpentry and Millwork E. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants F. Section 09 1 16: Gypsum Wallboard G. Division : Mechanical H. Division : Electrical 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions. Refer to Specification Section 00100 - Instructions to Bidders for site examination requirements and procedures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and complete technical data on all products to be furnished under this section. B. Submit shop drawings, layouts, construction and installation details and finish samples for products furnished under this section. 12322 - MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND CASEWORK - (PLASTIC LAMINATE) PAGE 2 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Section 1600 - Modular Cabinets shall apply and are hereby made a part of this specification. Cabinets shall be custom grade. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cabinets 1. Cabinet Design: Full flush overlay design with square door and drawer edges. To be solid industrial grade particleboard with high-pressure plastic laminate on all exposed surfaces and melamine lining. 2. 4" x 4" Laminate toe recess. 3. Shelves: 3/4" particleboard with melamine facing and PVC edge banding. 4. Hardware a) Pulls as selected from manufacturer's standards. b) Full extension drawer slides. c) Fully concealed hinges. d) Steel pin shelf supports. e) Locks where shown. 5. Laminate shall be selected from manufacturer's entire range. Approved laminate manufacturers include: a) Formica b) Nevamar c) Wilsonart 6. Acceptable Cabinet Manufacturers: a) LSI b) Sims c) Stevens d) Corsi 12322 - MANUFACTURED CABINETS AND CASEWORK - (PLASTIC LAMINATE) PAGE 3 OF 3 SCEC-III/08-08 e) TMI B. Countertop: As specified in Section 06400 - Finish Carpentry and Millwork. C. Furnish all fillers, moldings, trim, accessories, and incidentals as required for a complete, functional installation. 1. Miscellaneous items shall be of the same material and finish as the cabinets and casework. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of all cabinets and casework shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed specifications and the approved shop drawings. B. The direction of patterned on wood grain laminates shall be vertical on doors and panels, and drawer fronts (except that with wood grains the drawer fronts may be horizontal). 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the approved shop drawings and the Construction Documents. 3.03 DISPOSAL A. All waste materials shall be properly and legally disposed of off the site by this Contractor. Burning on the site will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 1 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 SECTION 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services necessary or incidental to the completion of all hydraulic elevators in accordance with the Contract Documents to include ladder from lowest landing to pit floor and sill supports at floors. B. This Contractor shall do all work and supply all material necessary for the complete installation, except that listed under "Work Not Included". It is the intention of this Specification to outline broadly the equipment required, but not to cover the details of design and construction. 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED The following work is included under other sections of this Specification: A. Legal hoistway, properly framed and enclosed. B. Hoistway pit with provisions in the pit floor for the drain. C. Electric feeders as required for signal system and car light, including a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker located in Machine Room. D. Pit light with switch on sidewall accessible from open hoistway door and from the pit. E. Pit convenience outlet, GFI. F. Necessary supports for guide rail brackets and cylinder. G. Machine Room, properly lighted and ventilated, including access, electrical GFI convenience outlet and adequate base for pumping unit. H. Electric and telephone service feeders to the elevator controller including a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker. I. Fused main line switch or circuit breaker of adequate capacity. 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 2 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 J . Electric power of same characteristics as the normal power supply for installation, testing and adjusting elevator equipment. K. Cutting and patching of walls, floors and partitions, including necessary openings for oil line from power unit to jack unit. L. Necessary recesses to accommodate hoistway doors, sills and signal equipment. M. Heat and smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA No. 72E and ANSI A17.1 in elevator lobbies. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 30 00: Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry C. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel D. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications E. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Wallboard F. Division 26: Electrical 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Elevator Contractor shall be one regularly engaged for the past five (5) years in the business of manufacturing, installing and servicing elevators of the type and character required by these Specifications. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Thyssen-Krupp Elevator Company 2. Otis Elevator Company 3. Schindler Elevator Company 4. Kone Elevator Company 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 3 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 1.05 CODES AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Work shall be done in accordance with the requirements of: A. Indiana Electrical Code B. Indiana Building Code, Current edition. C. American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumb-waiters, Escalators and Moving Walks (ANSI A-17.1), including all revisions in effect on date of this Specification, Indiana edition. D. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (July 26, 1991). E. All local codes which apply to this installation. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications, catalog information, illustrations and complete technical data on all products to be furnished under this Section. Provide one complete submittal which includes all items listed herein. B. Submit shop drawings showing the type, size and general arrangement of the elevator equipment, car construction, entrances, control and accessories. C. Submit physical samples (no photographic reproductions) of finish materials for color selections by Architect. D. Before final acceptance, furnish certifications indicating inspection and approval of all City and State agencies having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable storage area on or off the premises. Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 4 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 elevator contractor, upon notification from the General Contractor, will divert the elevator equipment to the storage area. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee the materials and workmanship of the apparatus installed under this Specification to be new and first class in every respect. He shall make good any defects in material and workmanship, not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use, which may develop within one (1) year from date of occupancy. 1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. A quality maintenance service consisting of regular examinations, adjustments and lubrication of the elevator equipment shall be provided by the elevator contractor for a period of select the appropriate new installation maintenance period: twelve (12) months after the elevator has been turned over for the customer's use. This service shall not be subcontracted but shall be performed by the elevator contractor. All work shall be performed by competent employees during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include emergency 24-hour callback service. This service shall not cover adjustments, repairs or replacements of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents caused by persons other than the elevator contractor. Only genuine parts and supplies as used in the manufacturer and installation of the original equipment shall be provided. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS A. As-built drawings, maintenance instructions, wiring diagrams and parts list shall be furnished complete and in triplicate prior to final completion and acceptance of the project, per Section 01700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Elevator : (Thyssen-Krupp Elevator Company AMEE 25 Twinpost Holeless or Equal) (Twinpost Telescopic not allowed) 1. Capacity: 2500 pounds 2. Speed: 110 FPM 3. Travel: 13'-0" 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 5 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 4. Stops: Two (2) 5. Openings: Two (2) inline see plans 6. Cab Size: 6'- 8" wide x 4'- 3" deep x 7'-4" height to ceiling 7. Power Supply: 3 ph, 4-wire, 60 Hz. (Field coordinate with Electrical Contractor) 8. Lighting Power Supply: 120 volts, 1 ph., 15 amp, 60 Hz. 9. Starting: Solid state soft start 10. Machine Location: First Floor see plans 11. Hoistway and Car Door Size: 3'-6" x 7'- 0" 12. Door Operation: Single-slide 2.02 ELEVATOR HYDRAULIC SYSTEM A. The hydraulic system shall be of compact design suitable for operation under the required pressure. The power component shall be mounted in the hydraulic-fluid storage tank. The control valve shall control flow for up and down directions hydraulically and shall include an integral check valve. A control section including control solenoids shall direct the main valve and control: up and down starting, acceleration, transition from full speed to leveling speed, up and down stops, pressure relief and manual lowering. All of these functions shall be fully adjustable for maximum smoothness and to meet contract conditions. System to be provided with a muffler, low-pressure switch and a shut-off valve. B. A microprocessor-based controller shall be provided, including necessary starting switches together with all relays, switches, solid-state components and hardware required for operation, including door operation, as described herein. A three (3) phase overload device shall be provided to protect the motor against overloading. C. A manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in the event of power failure or for adjusting purposes. D. Plunger(s) and Cylinder(s): Each cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe of 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 6 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 sufficient thickness and suitable for the operating pressure. The top of each cylinder shall be equipped with a cylinder head with a drip ring to collect any oil seepage as well as an internal guide ring and self-adjusting packing. Each plunger shall be constructed of selected steel tubing or pipe of proper diameter machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. Each plunger shall be provided with a stop ring electrically welded to it to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder. Each plunger and cylinder shall be installed plumb and shall operate freely with minimum friction. E. Low-oil control. F. Pressure switch. G. Include the following options as required. 1. Viscosity control. 2.03 HOISTWAY COMPONENTS A. Car Frame: A suitable car frame shall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure. The buffer striking plate on the underside of the car- frame platform assembly must fully compress the spring buffer mounted in the pit before the plunger reaches its lower limit of travel. B. Platform, Heavy Loading Type: The car platform shall be arranged to accommodate one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity, such as wheeled carts, stretchers, x-ray equipment, etc. The platform shall be recessed for flooring C. Car Guide Rails: Steel rails with brackets and fasteners. D. Spring Buffer: Helical coil spring type. E. Wiring: Wiring for hoistway electrical devices included in scope of the elevator system, hall panels, pit emergency stop switch and the traveling cable for the elevator car. 2.04 CAB ENCLOSURE A. Vertical Light-weight: Cab walls to be plastic laminated. 1. Laminate to be chosen from the elevator’s manufacturer's standard selection. B. Car Front Finish: Satin stainless steel with integral car door frame. 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 7 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Cab door face: Plastic Laminate . D. Car top to be of wood material clad on both sides with a natural finish aluminum panel. E. Ceiling type: Suspended ceiling which shall consist of white translucent polycarbonate diffusers set in a metal frame with fluorescent lighting fixtures. F. Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 12 volt, sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure. G. Exhaust Fan: An exhaust fan shall be mounted on the car top. H. A 125V 15 amperes utility outlet with ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection shall be furnished on car top. I. Handrail Type: Round Tubular Metal: 1-1/2" (38 mm) tubular stainless steel satin finish provided on the sides and rear of the car enclosure. J. Threshold: Aluminum. K. Protective pad hooks (S type) and quilted fire retardant protective pads. Buttons will be provided with non-suspended ceiling. L. An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit. M. Floor: Prepare floor and install carpet to match floor at landing. 2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete one-piece unit assembly. All frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway and shall be of 14-gauge (2 mm) sheet steel. Frames to have baked enamel finish, color to be selected from manufacturer’s standards. Face of frame to be 2” wide. Sills shall be extruded aluminum. B. Doors: Entrance doors shall be faced with Plastic laminate with stainless steel 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 8 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 binding. Hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel reinforcements. C. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be fire resistant per ASME A17.1. D. Entrance Markings: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4" x 4" (102) x (102 mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille adjacent. Markings shall be provided on both sides of the entrance. E. Sight Guards: Black sight guards will be furnished with any metal finish door. Backed enamel matching sight guards will be furnished with baked enamel doors. 2.06 ELEVATOR SIGNALS AND FIXTURES A. Car-Operating Panel: A panel shall be provided which contains all push-buttons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation. Raised markings shall be provided for each push-button. B. Car Position Indicator: A car position indicator shall be integral to the car-operating panel. C. Emergency Communication system: Provide hands-free audio and visual -way emergency communication between car and a 24-hour monitoring service. System automatically dials preprogrammed number of monitoring service and identifies elevator location to monitoring service. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet complete with identification, instructions for use, and battery back-up power supply, and complies with ADA regulations. D. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in the car entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound. E. Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation. F. Fixture Finish: Satin stainless steel. G. Certificate frame. H. Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to tell a passenger that the car is either stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator. 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 9 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 I. Hall Position Indicator at Main landing at First Floor. 2.07 OPERATIONAL FEATURES A. Floor Stopping Accuracy: Stopping shall be set at each floor to achieve not more than 1/4" (96 mm) from flush. Re-leveling correction shall occur at equal to or more than 1/2" (13 mm) from flush. B. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served. C. Other Car Operating Control Features: 1. Fire Fighters' Service. 2. Top-of-Car Inspection. 3. Car-Stall Protection. 4. Full Collective Operation. 5. Solid-state Starting. 6. Independent Service. D. Door Control Features: 1. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a normal hall or car call. 2. Door closing to be protected automatically by an infra-red multi-beam array projected across the door opening. The distance between beams shall not exceed 1-1/4" (33 mm) and the lowest beam shall not be located more than 5/8" (15 mm) above floor level. The reaction time of the door-closing protection system shall not exceed 60 milliseconds. If three (3) or more adjacent beams are interrupted, a reversal signal will cause the doors to reopen instantly. If they remain blocked for more than 80 seconds, they are considered permanently blocked. The doors will then either remain open indefinitely, go into nudging mode or remain open for a specified period of 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 10 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 time-depending on local codes and the door operating system. The doors will remain in this mode until the blockage is corrected. 3. Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustable period of time. E. Provide equipment according to Seismic zone: Reference Indiana Building Code, Current Edition. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Install fire fighters service instructions at main floor and in each car. B. Provide "No Smoking" sign inside car and fire pictogram in each hall station. C. Install emergency key box with proper keys and tag same. D. Install numbers on inside of hoistway doors. E. On Board Service tool PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Elevator contractor will review and confirm discrepancies in the work-by-others portion of this specification. Additionally, any other conditions under which this work is to be performed will also be reported on for noncompliance. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all elevator components except as specifically provided for elsewhere by others. B. Install elevator in accordance with accepted manufacturer's directions, ANSI A17.1 and all local applicable codes. C. Install machine room equipment with clearances complying with ANSI A17.1. D. Install items so that they may be removed by portable hoists or other means for easy maintenance. 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 11 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 E. Guide Rails 1. Install rails continuously for full height of hoistway with no gap at joints. 2. Align rails vertically within a tolerance of 1/32". 3. Provide all structural members and attachments required for complete installation. F. Entrances 1. Align within tolerance of 1/32". 2. Grout of entrance frames and sills by others (Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry). 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all personnel, equipment and instruments required for inspection and testing. B. Have acceptance inspection performed by the authority having jurisdiction. C. In addition to inspections and test required by local authority, perform all applicable inspections and tests required by Part X, ANSI A17.1. 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjustments 1. Adjust all equipment to operate to within accepted design tolerances. 2. Adjust car leveling devices so car stops within +/- 1/4" of finished floor. 3. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with accepted manufacturer's instructions. B. Painting 1. Paint all exposed metal work furnished for this installation, except wearing surfaces, with one shop coat of high grade rust preventative paint. 2. Touch-up factory applied paint surfaces as required. 14 24 25 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (HOLELESS) PAGE 12 OF 12 SCEC-III/08-08 C. Clean-Up 1. Remove from hoistway surfaces all loose materials and filings resulting from this work. 2. Clean machine room floor of dirt, oil and grease. 3. Remove crating and packing materials from premises. 3.05 TEMPORARY USE A. If temporary use of the elevator is required before the elevator is placed in service by the Owner, the Elevator Contractor shall make such car available on a day-to-day basis, after the Elevator Contractor's temporary acceptance form has been signed by the General Contractor. B. Temporary enclosures, guards or other protection of hoistway openings, and such other items as are necessary to permit temporary operation of the elevator, shall be provided by the General Contractor. The expense of an operator for temporary use shall be paid by the General Contractor. C. The General Contractor shall provide maintenance during the period of temporary operation and shall return the elevator to the Elevator Contractor at the conclusion of this period in the same condition of repair and maintenance as existed when temporary acceptance was given. D. Temporary use of the elevator shall be scheduled and coordinated to expedite completion of the total project. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator operation with the Owner or Owner's representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. The elevator contractor shall determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION